Canon MG8100 series On-screen Manual Page 1 of 1135 pages How to Use This Manual Printing This Manual MC-5160-V1.00 Basic Guide Advanced Guide Describes the summary of this product. Describes the detailed function of this product.
MG8100 series Basic Guide Page 2 of 1135 pages How to Use This Manual Printing This Manual About Disc Label Printing MP-5035-V1.
Overview of the Machine Page 3 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Overview of the Machine Overview of the Machine This section shows the component names of the machine and describes the basic operations you need to know before using it.
Main Components Page 4 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Overview of the Machine > Main Components C001 Main Components Front View Rear View Inside View Operation Panel Front View (1) Document Cover Open to load an original on the Platen Glass. (2) Paper Support Raise and tip back to load paper in the Rear Tray. (3) Rear Tray Load photo paper or envelopes which you can use on the machine.
Main Components (8) Scanner Lock Switch Locks the scanner to prevent sliding or damage when transporting the machine. Be sure to unlock it before turning the power on. (9) Platen Glass Load an original to copy or scan. (10) FAU (Film Adapter Unit) Protective Sheet Protects the FAU lamp and the Platen Glass. The Film Guide used for scanning film can be stored behind the FAU Protective Sheet. See Loading the Films . (11) FAU (Film Adapter Unit) lamp Lights up the film when scanning films.
Main Components Rear View (15) Wired LAN Connector Plug in the LAN cable to connect the machine to a LAN. Important Do not touch the metal casing. Note Remove the LAN connector cap before connecting the LAN cable. (16) USB Port Plug in the USB cable to connect the machine with a computer. Important Do not touch the metal casing. Do not plug in or unplug the USB cable while the machine is printing or scanning originals with the computer. (17) Rear Cover Detach to remove jammed paper.
Main Components Page 7 of 1135 pages (20) Print Head Holder Install the Print Head. (21) Print Head Lock Lever Locks the Print Head into place. Important Do not raise this lever after installing the Print Head. (22) Scanning Unit (Cover) Scans originals. Open it to replace ink tanks, to check ink lamps, or to remove jammed paper inside the machine. When opening the Scanning Unit (Cover), lift it with the Document Cover closed. (23) Access lamp Lights or flashes to indicate the memory card status.
Main Components Page 8 of 1135 pages Turns the power on or off. Before turning on the power, make sure that the Document Cover is closed. Important Disconnecting the power plug When disconnecting the power plug after turning off the power, be sure to confirm that the POWER lamp is not lit. If the power plug is disconnected from the wall outlet while the POWER lamp is lit or flashing, the machine may become unable to print properly since the Print Head is not protected.
Main Components Page 9 of 1135 pages See Using the Operation Panel . Note When Operation panel buttons are touched, the machine generates keypad or alarm sounds as necessary. For information about setting sound volume, see Machine Settings.
How to Navigate Menus on the LCD Page 10 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Overview of the Machine > How to Navigate Menus on the LCD C002 How to Navigate Menus on the LCD You can use the machine to print photos on a memory card or USB flash drive, make copies, or scan originals without a computer. You can also make good use of the various functions of the machine with the menu screen and the settings screen on the LCD.
How to Navigate Menus on the LCD Be careful not to trace your finger along the Page 11 of 1135 pages Scroll Wheel when you touch the , , , or button. When it is indicated in this guide that the Scroll Wheel can be used, it is also described in the operation procedure, i.e., " , , , or button ( Scroll Wheel )". Selecting Menus on the HOME Screen HOME button is touched.
How to Navigate Menus on the LCD You can save/forward scanned data to your computer or save them on a memory card or USB flash drive with the Operation Panel. See Scanning . Photo reprint You can reprint printed photos or print photos from 35 mm films (film strip or mount films). See Reprinting Photos from Printed Photos . Fun photo print You can print stickers, calenders, and other photo items using photos on a memory card or USB flash drive. See Functions in Fun photo print .
How to Navigate Menus on the LCD , , , or button ( Scroll Wheel ) (I) to select an On the menu screen or settings screen, use the item, then touch the OK button (J) to proceed with the procedure. To return to the previous screen, touch the Back button (K). Using the Function buttons The following describes the operation on the photo selection screen as an example. The functions and number of function menus vary depending on the screen.
How to Navigate Menus on the LCD Page 14 of 1135 pages Basic Operation on the Settings Screen or button ( Scroll Wheel ) (I) to select an item, On screens for changing print settings, use the or button to select an option, then touch the OK button (J). use the On the Print settings screen of Photo, for example, the procedure to change the print quality is as follows. 1. Use the or 2. Use the or button ( Scroll Wheel ) to select Print qlty. button to select High, and touch the OK button.
How to Navigate Menus on the LCD Page 15 of 1135 pages Returning to the Previous Screen The screen will return to the previous screen every time you touch the Back button (O). Canceling a Copy, Print, or Scan Job You can touch the Stop button (P) to cancel a print, copy, or scan job in progress.
Printing Photos Page 16 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Printing Photos Printing Photos You can preview photos from a memory card or USB flash drive on the LCD, to select and print the desired photo. You can also print your favorite photos in various layouts or use them for making a sticker.
Printing Photos Saved on the Memory Card / USB Flash Drive Advanced Guide Page 17 of 1135 pages Troubleshooting Contents > Printing Photos > Printing Photos Saved on the Memory Card / USB Flash Drive C011 Printing Photos Saved on the Memory Card / USB Flash Drive Preview each photo from the memory card or USB flash drive on the LCD, to select and print the desired photo. This section describes the procedure to print borderless photos on 4" x 6" / 10 x 15 cm photo paper.
Printing Photos Saved on the Memory Card / USB Flash Drive 2. Page 18 of 1135 pages Insert a memory card or USB flash drive. (1) Select Photo on the HOME screen. See Selecting Menus on the HOME Screen . The message "USB flash drive or memory card is not set." will appear. (2) Insert a memory card or USB flash drive. Memory card: Insert it WITH THE LABELED SIDE FACING TO THE LEFT into the Card Slot.
Printing Photos Saved on the Memory Card / USB Flash Drive Page 19 of 1135 pages (A) USB flash drive (B) Memory card Note If a memory card or USB flash drive is inserted on the HOME screen, copy standby screen, etc., the photo selection screen in Select photo print will also appear. For details, refer to the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide . Do not insert memory card and USB flash drive at the same time. Also do not insert two or more memory cards at the same time.
Printing Photos Saved on the Memory Card / USB Flash Drive Page 20 of 1135 pages See Using Various Functions . 4. Start printing. (1) Touch the right Function button (G) to select Print settings, and confirm the page size, media type, print quality, etc. Here we confirm that 4"x6" (10x15cm) is selected for Page size and the type of loaded photo paper for Type.
Printing Photos Saved on the Memory Card / USB Flash Drive Page 21 of 1135 pages (1) Page size Select the page size of the paper to print: 4"x6" (10x15cm), A4, etc. (2) Type (Media type) Select the media type of the paper to print: Plus Glossy II, Glossy, etc. Note If you do not select the page size and media type correctly, the machine may feed paper from the wrong paper source or may not print with the proper print quality. See Paper Sources to Load Paper .
Using Various Functions Page 22 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Printing Photos > Using Various Functions C012 Using Various Functions You can print photos in various ways when you use the left Function button to select Menu on the photo selection screen. You can also use the useful functions to print photos. For details, refer to the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide.
Using Various Functions Page 23 of 1135 pages Photo Index print ID photo size print Calendar print Other Useful Functions Besides the functions selected on the Photo menu screen, you can specify the display style of photos, cropping, photo fix, date print, etc. For details, refer to the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide. Changing the Display To display the Change view/mode screen, touch the center Function button on the photo selection screen. The Standard view mode shows a single photo.
Using Various Functions Page 24 of 1135 pages Auto photo fix Printing Photos with Shot Date or File Number If ON is selected for Print date or Print file no. on the Print settings screen, the selected photos can be printed with shot date or file number. Print date Print file no.
Inserting the Memory Card Page 25 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Printing Photos > Inserting the Memory Card C013 Inserting the Memory Card Before Inserting the Memory Card The following types of memory cards and image data are compatible with the machine. Important Image data shot by the digital camera If you took and saved photos on a type of memory card that does not guarantee the operation on your digital camera, the image data may be unreadable on the machine or damaged.
Inserting the Memory Card Page 26 of 1135 pages RS-MMC *3 MMCmobile *3 Memory Stick Micro *4 *1 Use the special "SD Card Adapter". *2 Requires purchase of a separate compact flash card adapter for xD-Picture Card. *3 Use the special card adapter. *4 Use the special Duo size adapter or full size adapter. Printable Image Data This machine accepts images taken with a camera compliant with the Design rule for Camera File system (Exif 2.2/2.21 compliant), TIFF (Exif 2.2/2.21 compliant).
Inserting the Memory Card 3. Page 27 of 1135 pages Insert only one memory card into the Card Slot. The location to insert a memory card varies depending on each type of memory card. Insert your memory card straightforward WITH THE LABELED SIDE FACING TO THE LEFT into the Card Slot, according to the insert location in the figure below. When the memory card is inserted properly, the Access lamp (A) will light up. Be sure to attach the card adapter for memory card with the mark Slot as shown below.
Inserting the Memory Card Page 28 of 1135 pages Important Part of the memory card will protrude from the Card Slot, but do not force it into the slot any further. This can damage the machine or the memory card. Make sure that the memory card is correctly oriented before inserting it into the Card Slot. If you force the memory card into the Card Slot in the wrong orientation, the memory card or the machine can be damaged. Do not insert more than one memory card at a time. 4. Close the Card Slot Cover.
Inserting the USB Flash Drive Page 29 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Printing Photos > Inserting the USB Flash Drive C014 Inserting the USB Flash Drive Inserting the USB Flash Drive Note Before inserting the USB flash drive If your USB flash drive cannot be inserted into the Direct Print Port of the machine, you may be required to use an extension cable for the USB flash drive. Purchase it at electronics retail stores.
Inserting the USB Flash Drive Page 30 of 1135 pages Page top
Copying Page 31 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Copying Copying You can copy in the various methods such as enlarging/reducing or copying two original pages onto a single sheet of paper.
Making Copies Page 32 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Copying > Making Copies C021 Making Copies This section describes the procedure to copy a document of A4 size on plain paper. For the operation, see the notes and operation procedure described in the reference page. You need to prepare: Originals to copy. See Originals You Can Load . Paper for printing. See Media Types You Can Use . 1. Prepare for copying. (1) Turn on the power. See Operation Panel . (2) Load paper.
Making Copies Page 33 of 1135 pages (4) Select Copy on the HOME screen. See Selecting Menus on the HOME Screen . (5) Load an original on the Platen Glass. See Loading Originals . To load the original on the Platen Glass, align it with the alignment mark FACING DOWN as shown below. WITH THE SIDE TO COPY Then close the Document Cover gently. Note For details on the types and conditions of the original which can be copied, and how to load the original, see Loading Originals .
Making Copies Page 34 of 1135 pages (4) Touch the right Function button (D) to select Print settings, and confirm the page size, media type, etc. Here we confirm that A4 is selected for Page size and Plain paper for Type. To change the settings, use the button ( Scroll Wheel) (B) to select the item to change, and use or OK button the button (C) to select an option. After confirming or changing the settings, touch the or to return to the copy standby screen.
Making Copies Page 35 of 1135 pages (1) Magnif. (Magnification) Specify the enlargement/reduction manner. You can specify the copy scale by selecting the page size: A4 to A5, A4 to B5, etc. If you do not want to enlarge/reduce the page size, select SameMagnification. (2) Intensity Specify the intensity when you want to make the darkened/lightened copy. Select Auto to automatically adjust the intensity according to the original. (3) Page size Select the page size of the paper to print: A4, 8.
Using Various Copy Functions Page 36 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Copying > Using Various Copy Functions C022 Using Various Copy Functions You can make various kinds of copies, such as making borderless copies or copying two pages onto a single sheet, if you touch the left Function button to select Copy menu on the copy standby screen. For details, refer to the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide.
Using Various Copy Functions Page 37 of 1135 pages 4-on-1 copy Borderless copy Frame erase copy Page top
Reprinting Photos from Printed Photos Page 38 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Reprinting Photos from Printed Photos Reprinting Photos from Printed Photos You can reprint printed photos or print photos from films without computer.
Reprinting Printed Photos Page 39 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Reprinting Photos from Printed Photos > Reprinting Printed Photos C031 Reprinting Printed Photos Reprint printed photos. This section describes the procedure to scan printed photos and print them on 4" x 6" / 10 x 15 cm photo paper. Note You cannot save scanned images with this function. To save scanned images on the computer, memory card, or USB flash drive, refer to the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide .
Reprinting Printed Photos Page 40 of 1135 pages (1) Open the Document Cover. (2) Load the photos WITH THE SIDE TO SCAN FACING DOWN on the Platen Glass. See Loading Originals . (A) To load four photos on the Platen Glass (B) To load two photos on the Platen Glass *1: 0.4 inches / 10 mm Note Place the photo(s) at least 0.4 inches / 10 mm away from and in square with the edges of the Platen Glass. When loading two or more photos at the same time, place them at least 0.
Reprinting Printed Photos Page 41 of 1135 pages (3) Use the [ +] or [ -] button to specify the number of copies. Note appears at the upper left of the photo, it may not have been scanned properly. Touch the left Function button to select Rescan. Confirm the message, and repeat the procedures from step 2 to scan the photo again. Touch the center Function button to display the trimming screen, and crop photos. See Cropping Photos .
Printing Photos from Films Page 42 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Reprinting Photos from Printed Photos > Printing Photos from Films C151 Printing Photos from Films Print photos from a 35 mm film strip or mount films (positive films for slides). You need to prepare: 35 mm film strip (a series of six frames on a strip) or 35 mm mount film (positive film for slide) Paper for photo printing. See Media Types You Can Use .
Printing Photos from Films Page 43 of 1135 pages (5) Select Reprint from film and touch the OK button. (6) Select Color negative film, B&W negative film, Color positive film, or Mounted slides according to your film, and touch the OK button. Here we select Color negative film. 2. Load the film strip or mount films on the Platen Glass. If Color negative film, B&W negative film, or Color positive film is selected, see If Mounted slides is selected, see 3. Loading the Film Strip .
Loading the Films Page 44 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Reprinting Photos from Printed Photos > Loading the Films Loading the Films You can use the Film Guide stored behind the Document Cover to load the films. Loading the Film Strip Loading the Mount Films Removing the Films Film strip Mount films (positive films for slides) See Loading the Film Strip . See Loading the Mount Films .
Loading the Film Strip Page 45 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Reprinting Photos from Printed Photos > Loading the Films > Loading the Film Strip C152 Loading the Film Strip Mount the film strip in the Film Guide stored behind the Document Cover, and then load it on the Platen Glass. To scan the film strip with a computer, follow the same procedure below. 1. Remove the Film Guide from the FAU (Film Adapter Unit) Protective Sheet.
Loading the Film Strip (2) TURN OVER THE FILM STRIP (with the correct image facing down) so that THE IMAGES WILL BE UPSIDE DOWN, and insert the edges of the film strip into the slots of the Film Strip Frame. The film order must be FROM LEFT TO RIGHT. Note The film strip with up to six frames can be mounted in the Film Strip Frame. Mount the film strip so that the film runs from left to right in the same direction as the scanning direction.
Loading the Film Strip Page 47 of 1135 pages Note Depending on how the end of the film is cut, the borderlines between frames may not line up with the white lines on the Film Holder. In such a case, align them by adjusting the film position. 3. Load the Film Guide to fit in the grooves on the right and left sides on the Platen Glass. Note When a film strip that is shorter than the Film Strip Frame is scanned, portion of an image near the open area may appear pale.
Loading the Mount Films Page 48 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Reprinting Photos from Printed Photos > Loading the Films > Loading the Mount Films C153 Loading the Mount Films Load the Film Guide without the Film Strip Frame on the Platen Glass, and then mount the mount films in the Film Guide. To scan the mount films with a computer, follow the same procedure below. 1. Remove the Film Guide from the FAU Protective Sheet.
Loading the Mount Films Note The Film Strip Frame is not necessary for mounting the mount films. Be sure to remove the Film Strip Frame. 3. Load the Film Guide to fit in the grooves on the right and left sides of the Platen Glass with the side showing the film mark (G) facing up. 4. Mount the mount films in the Film Guide. TURN OVER THE MOUNT FILMS (with the correct image facing down) so that THE IMAGES WILL BE UPSIDE DOWN, and mount the mount films in the film order FROM LEFT TO RIGHT.
Loading the Mount Films Page 50 of 1135 pages Note Up to four mount films can be mounted in the Film Guide.
Removing the Films Page 51 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Reprinting Photos from Printed Photos > Loading the Films > Removing the Films C154 Removing the Films Remove the films from the Film Guide, and store the Film Guide onto the Document Cover again. 1. Open the Document Cover to remove the Film Guide. 2. Remove the film strip or mount films from the Film Guide. For the mount films: After the mount films are removed, reassemble the Film Strip Frame with the Film Guide.
Removing the Films Page 52 of 1135 pages Important Once the photo printing from the film has been completed, be sure to store the removed Film Guide behind the FAU Protective Sheet and reattach the FAU Protective Sheet to the Document Cover. The FAU Protective Sheet should remain attached when copying or scanning originals other than films, such as documents or photos.
Using Various Functions Page 53 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Reprinting Photos from Printed Photos > Using Various Functions C032 Using Various Functions This section introduces a few of the useful functions in Photo reprint. For details, refer to the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide. Printing Photos in Various Layouts You can select a layout and print photos other than Select and print.
Scanning Page 54 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Scanning Scanning You can save or forward scanned data to your computer, and edit or process them with the supplied software application. You can also save scanned data on a memory card or USB flash drive inserted into the machine.
Saving Scanned Data to the Computer Page 55 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Scanning > Saving Scanned Data to the Computer C041 Saving Scanned Data to the Computer You can save or forward scanned data to the computer with the USB cable or via a network. This section describes the procedure to detect the type of original automatically with Auto scan, and save the scanned data to the computer connecting with the USB cable, according to the settings specified with MP Navigator EX.
Saving Scanned Data to the Computer (2) Select Scan Page 56 of 1135 pages on the HOME screen. See Selecting Menus on the HOME Screen . If you have ever specified a computer for saving scanned data, go to (5). (3) Use the button. or button ( Scroll Wheel ) to select PC , and touch the OK The computer selection screen will appear. Besides saving scanned data on the computer, you can save them on a memory card or USB flash drive, or attach them to E-mail on the computer.
Saving Scanned Data to the Computer Page 57 of 1135 pages PDF). If you want to scan another original, load it on the Platen Glass, and touch the Color or Black button again. Remove the original on the Platen Glass after scanning is completed. Important Do not stare at the light directly for an extended period of time when scanning originals. Do not turn off the power while the machine is operating.
Saving Scanned Data to the Computer Page 58 of 1135 pages Display a preview of the scanned image on the LCD when Memory card or USB flash drive is selected in Save/Forward and the original is scanned from the Platen Glass. (5) Reduce show-thru *2 *3 Reduce show-through of the opposite side of a text document, or lighten the color of recycled paper, newspaper, etc. (6) Descreen *2 *3 Reduce the moire effect when uneven gradations or stripe patterns appear on the original to be scanned.
Using Various Scan Functions Page 59 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Scanning > Using Various Scan Functions C042 Using Various Scan Functions Besides saving scanned data to the computer, you can save them on a memory card or USB flash drive, or attach them to E-mail on the computer, if you touch the left Function button to select Save/Forward on the scan standby screen. For details, refer to the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide.
Printing from Your Computer Page 60 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Printing from Your Computer Printing from Your Computer This section describes the procedure to print documents or photos with a computer. You can easily print photos taken with your digital camera by using Easy-PhotoPrint EX supplied with the machine.
Printing Photos (Easy-PhotoPrint EX) Page 61 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Printing from Your Computer > Printing Photos (Easy-PhotoPrint EX) C051 Printing Photos (Easy-PhotoPrint EX) Print image data saved on your computer by using Easy-PhotoPrint EX supplied with the machine. This section describes the procedure to print borderless photos on 4" x 6" / 10 x 15 cm photo paper. For details on Easy-PhotoPrint EX, refer to the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide .
Printing Photos (Easy-PhotoPrint EX) Page 62 of 1135 pages In addition to photo printing, functions for creating albums, calendars, and other photo items are available. See Using Various Functions of Easy-PhotoPrint EX. 3. Select a photo to print. (1) Select the folder in which images are saved. (2) Click the image to print. The number of copies appears as "1", and the image you selected appears in the selected image area (A). You can select two or more images at the same time.
Printing Photos (Easy-PhotoPrint EX) Page 63 of 1135 pages If you select A4 or Letter-sized plain paper when Automatically Select is selected in Paper Source, the machine feeds the paper from the Cassette. If you select other sizes or types of paper such as photo paper, the machine feeds the paper from the Rear Tray. If you select the wrong page size or media type, the machine may feed paper from the wrong paper source or may not print with the proper print quality. (4) Click Layout/Print. 5.
Using Various Functions of Easy-PhotoPrint EX Page 64 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Printing from Your Computer > Printing Photos (Easy-PhotoPrint EX) > Using Various Functions of EasyPhotoPrint EX C052 Using Various Functions of Easy-PhotoPrint EX This section introduces a few of the useful functions of Easy-PhotoPrint EX. For details, refer to the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide. Creating Your Own Prints You can create an album or calendar using your photos.
Printing Documents Page 65 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Printing from Your Computer > Printing Documents C053 Printing Documents This section describes the procedure to print a document of A4 size on plain paper. For details, refer to the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide. Note Operations may vary depending on your software application. For details on the operation, refer to the instruction manual of your application.
Printing Documents (1) Select Business Document in Commonly Used Settings. Note When the print object such as Business Document or Photo Printing is selected in Commonly Used Settings, the items in Additional Features will be selected automatically. The settings suitable for the print object such as media type or print quality will also appear. (2) Make sure of the displayed settings.
Printing Documents Page 67 of 1135 pages Note To cancel a print job in progress, touch the Stop button on the machine or click Cancel Printing on the printer status monitor. After canceling the print job, blank sheets of paper may be ejected. To display the printer status monitor, click the printer icon on the taskbar. In Windows Vista operating system (hereafter referred to as "Windows Vista") or Windows XP, click Canon XXX Printer (where "XXX " is your machine's name) on the taskbar.
Printing Web Pages (Easy-WebPrint EX) Page 68 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Printing from Your Computer > Printing Web Pages (Easy-WebPrint EX) C054 Printing Web Pages (Easy-WebPrint EX) Easy-WebPrint EX provides quick and easy printing of web pages for Internet Explorer. You can print web pages automatically resized to fit the paper width without cutting off the sides of pages, or preview and select the desired web pages to print.
Printing Web Pages (Easy-WebPrint EX) Page 69 of 1135 pages Page top
Starting Various Software Applications Page 70 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Printing from Your Computer > Starting Various Software Applications C055 Starting Various Software Applications This section describes Solution Menu EX, which is used to start the software applications supplied with the machine. The information on Easy-WebPrint EX, a software application for printing web pages, is also included.
Starting Various Software Applications Make sure that genuine Canon ink tanks are installed properly for all colors. Help & Settings View the Solution Menu EX online help or the on-screen manual of the machine. Set up Solution Menu EX or the machine. Start Application Start the supplied software applications such as Easy-PhotoPrint EX and My Printer. With My Printer, you can display the printer driver setup window, and get information on what action to take if you have trouble with the operation.
Starting Various Software Applications Note In addition to photo printing, functions for creating albums, calendars, and other photo items are available. For details on operations and functions of Easy-PhotoPrint EX, see Printing Photos (EasyPhotoPrint EX). Easy-WebPrint EX When Easy-WebPrint EX is installed, it adds a toolbar to your Internet Explorer screen. The toolbar is available whenever Internet Explorer is running.
Starting Various Software Applications Bordered (full) print Page 73 of 1135 pages Index print Color Management Function Compatible with Adobe RGB sRGB Adobe RGB Color Correction While Viewing a Sample Pattern Produce Retro Flavor by Grayscale Photos Cool Tone Black/White (Default) Warm Tone Starting Easy-PhotoPrint Pro Starting from Digital Photo Professional 1. Select photos to print in Digital Photo Professional. 2.
Starting Various Software Applications Page 74 of 1135 pages Starting from Adobe Photoshop or Adobe Photoshop Elements 1. Open files of photos to print in Adobe Photoshop or Adobe Photoshop Elements. 2. From the File menu of Adobe Photoshop or Adobe Photoshop Elements, select Canon Easy-PhotoPrint Pro... in Automate. Easy-PhotoPrint Pro starts and the photos opened in Adobe Photoshop or Adobe Photoshop Elements appear in Easy-PhotoPrint Pro.
Other Usages Page 75 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Other Usages Other Usages This section introduces the document print function to print PDF files on the memory card or USB flash drive, the function to print the template forms such as notebook paper, graph paper, etc., the setting items of the machine, and the function to print directly from a digital camera or mobile phone.
Printing PDF Files Saved on the Memory Card / USB Flash Drive Advanced Guide Page 76 of 1135 pages Troubleshooting Contents > Other Usages > Printing PDF Files Saved on the Memory Card / USB Flash Drive C061 Printing PDF Files Saved on the Memory Card / USB Flash Drive You can print documents (PDF files) on the memory card or USB flash drive directly with the machine. To start document printing, follow the operation below. For details, refer to the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide.
Printing the Template Forms such as Notebook Paper Page 77 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Other Usages > Printing the Template Forms such as Notebook Paper C062 Printing the Template Forms such as Notebook Paper You can print various template forms such as notebook paper, graph paper, etc., with the machine. For details, refer to the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide. To print template forms with the machine, select Special print Template print.
Printing Photos Directly from Your Digital Camera or Mobile Phone Advanced Guide Page 78 of 1135 pages Troubleshooting Contents > Other Usages > Printing Photos Directly from Your Digital Camera or Mobile Phone C063 Printing Photos Directly from Your Digital Camera or Mobile Phone Printing Photos from a PictBridge Compliant Device You can connect the PictBridge compliant device to this machine with a USB cable that is recommended by the device's manufacturer, and print saved images directly.
Printing Photos Directly from Your Digital Camera or Mobile Phone Page 79 of 1135 pages You can easily print image data with wireless infrared communication from your mobile phone. If the optional Bluetooth Unit BU-30 is connected to the machine, you can print image data with wireless communication from Bluetooth compatible mobile phones or computers. Advanced Guide .
Machine Settings Page 80 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Other Usages > Machine Settings C064 Machine Settings This section describes the items you can set or change in Device settings of Setup. Advanced Guide . For details on setting or changing, refer to the on-screen manual: Plain paper feed settings Selects the paper source (Rear Tray or Cassette) in which you load plain paper. The machine feeds plain paper from the Cassette by default.
Machine Settings Device user settings Date display format Selects the format of date that is displayed on the LCD or printed on papers. Read/write attribute Selects whether to use the Card Slot of the machine as the memory card drive of a computer. Volume control Adjusts the keypad volume generated when touching the buttons on the Operation Panel, or the alarm volume generated when there is a conflict in the settings or an error.
Machine Settings Page 82 of 1135 pages Page top
Loading Paper / Originals Page 83 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Loading Paper / Originals Loading Paper / Originals This section describes types of paper or originals you can load, how to load printing paper in the Rear Tray or Cassette, and how to load originals to copy or scan.
Loading Paper Page 84 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Loading Paper / Originals > Loading Paper C071 Loading Paper Paper Sources to Load Paper Loading Paper in the Cassette Loading Paper in the Rear Tray Media Types You Can Use Media Types You Cannot Use Paper Sources to Load Paper The machine has two paper sources to feed paper; Cassette and Rear Tray. You can load paper in either one of the paper sources, depending on the page size and media type of paper.
Loading Paper Page 85 of 1135 pages Page top
Loading Paper in the Cassette Page 86 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Loading Paper / Originals > Loading Paper > Loading Paper in the Cassette C072 Loading Paper in the Cassette You can load only A4, B5, A5, or Letter-sized plain paper in the Cassette. Load other sizes or types of paper in the Rear Tray. See Media Types You Can Use . Note Advice for printing on plain paper We recommend Canon genuine photo paper for printing photos.
Loading Paper in the Cassette Cassette. Note There may be a little space between the Paper Guide (A) and the paper stack. (4) Slide the Paper Guide (B) on the left to align completely with the side of the paper stack. Note Do not load sheets of paper higher than the Load Limit Mark (C). (5) Insert the Cassette into the machine. Push the Cassette all the way into the machine. 3. Open the Paper Output Tray gently, and open the Output Tray Extension.
Loading Paper in the Cassette Page 88 of 1135 pages Page top
Loading Paper in the Rear Tray Page 89 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Loading Paper / Originals > Loading Paper > Loading Paper in the Rear Tray C073 Loading Paper in the Rear Tray You can load photo paper or envelopes in the Rear Tray. Loading Photo Paper Important If you cut plain paper into small size such as 4" x 6" / 10 x 15 cm, 4" x 8" / 101.6 x 203.2 mm, 5" x 7" / 13 x 18 cm, or 2.16" x 3.58" / 55.0 x 91.0 mm (Card size) to perform trial print, it can cause paper jams.
Loading Paper in the Rear Tray Important Always load paper in the portrait orientation (B). Loading paper in the landscape orientation (C) can cause paper jams. Note Do not load sheets of paper higher than the Load Limit Mark (D). Note After loading paper When using the machine to copy or print without a computer, select the size and type of the loaded paper for Page size and Type on the print settings screen.
Loading Paper in the Rear Tray Page 91 of 1135 pages See Changing the Settings in "Printing Photos Saved on the Memory Card / USB Flash Drive" or Changing the Settings in "Making Copies". When printing with a computer, select the size and type of the loaded paper in Printer Paper Size and Media Type in the printer driver. See Printing Documents .
Loading Envelopes Page 92 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Loading Paper / Originals > Loading Paper > Loading Paper in the Rear Tray > Loading Envelopes C074 Loading Envelopes You can print on European DL and US #10 envelopes. The address is automatically rotated and printed according to the envelope's direction by specifying with the printer driver properly. Important You can only print on envelopes with the computer. Do not use the following envelopes.
Loading Envelopes the Rear Tray WITH THE ADDRESS SIDE FACING YOU. The folded flap of the envelope will be faced down on the left side. Up to 10 envelopes can be loaded at once. (4) Slide the Paper Guides (A) to align them with both sides of the envelopes. Do not slide the Paper Guides too hard. The envelopes may not be fed properly. (B) Rear side (C) Address side Note Do not load envelopes higher than the Load Limit Mark (D). 3. Specify the settings with the printer driver.
Loading Envelopes Page 94 of 1135 pages Note If the print result is upside down, open the printer driver setup window, select Envelope in Commonly Used Settings, then select the Rotate 180 degrees check box in Additional Features. Printing Documents .
Media Types You Can Use Page 95 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Loading Paper / Originals > Loading Paper > Media Types You Can Use C075 Media Types You Can Use Choose paper suitable for printing, for the best print results. Canon provides you various types of paper to enhance the fun of printing, such as stickers as well as papers for photo or document. We recommend the use of Canon genuine paper for printing your important photos.
Media Types You Can Use Page 96 of 1135 pages To specify the page size and media type when printing photos saved on a PictBridge compliant Advanced Guide .
Media Types You Can Use *1 If you are using Fine Art Paper "Photo Rag", you cannot print in the 1.38 inches / 35 mm margin on the top and bottom edges according to the direction of printing. If you select a special page size for Fine Art Paper in the printer driver, a limit is set to prevent printing in the 1.38 inches / 35 mm margin on the top and bottom edges of the paper. We recommend checking the printing area in the preview screen before printing.
Media Types You Can Use Page 98 of 1135 pages When printing photos saved on your mobile phone onto sticker paper, select Stickers for the page size in Mobile phone print settings under Device settings in Setup. Refer to the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide . Note Feeding this paper from the Cassette can damage the machine. Always load in the Rear Tray. You can easily specify print settings with Easy-PhotoPrint EX provided on the ROM . Install it on your computer.
Media Types You Can Use Page 99 of 1135 pages Duplex printing is not available for full-page borderless printing. You cannot use A5, B5, and Legal-sized paper, and envelopes for full-page borderless printing. You can use plain paper for full-page borderless printing only when printing from a computer. However, this may result in lower print quality. We recommend using plain paper for a trial print.
Media Types You Cannot Use Page 100 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Loading Paper / Originals > Loading Paper > Media Types You Cannot Use C076 Media Types You Cannot Use Do not use the following types of paper. Using such paper will cause not only unsatisfactory results, but also the machine to jam or malfunction.
Loading Originals Page 101 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Loading Paper / Originals > Loading Originals C077 Loading Originals This section describes the procedure to load originals on the Platen Glass. Loading Originals How to Load Originals for Each Function Originals You Can Load You may have to load the original in a different position depending on the function you selected in Copy, Photo reprint, or Scan.
Loading Originals Page 102 of 1135 pages Failure to observe the above may cause the scanner to malfunction or the Platen Glass to break. 2. Close the Document Cover gently.
How to Load Originals for Each Function Page 103 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Loading Paper / Originals > Loading Originals > How to Load Originals for Each Function C078 How to Load Originals for Each Function Loading the Original to Be Aligned with the Alignment Mark Load originals to copy In Scan, - select Auto scan for Doc. type to scan text documents, magazines, or newspapers - select Document or Photo for Doc. type and specify a standard size (A4, Letter, etc.
How to Load Originals for Each Function Page 104 of 1135 pages (B) 0.12 inches / 3.0 mm (C) 0.20 inches / 5.0 mm (D) 0.13 inches / 3.4 mm (0.25 inches / 6.4 mm for Letter and Legal-sized paper) (E) 0.13 inches / 3.4 mm (0.25 inches / 6.3 mm for Letter and Legal-sized paper) Loading Only One Original in the Center of the Platen Glass Scan only one printed photo in Photo reprint In Scan, - select Auto scan for Doc.
How to Load Originals for Each Function Page 105 of 1135 pages (A) 0.4 inches / 10 mm Note The Skew Correction function automatically compensates for the originals placed at an angle of up to approximately 10 degrees. Slanted photos with a long edge of 7.1 inches / 180 mm or more cannot be corrected. Non-rectangular or irregular shaped photos (such as cut out photos) may not be scanned properly.
Originals You Can Load Page 106 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Loading Paper / Originals > Loading Originals > Originals You Can Load C079 Originals You Can Load You can copy or scan the following originals. Types of originals: Text document, magazine, or newspaper Printed photo, postcard, business card, or disc (BD/DVD/CD, etc.) Film (positive/negative 35 mm film strip and 35 mm mount film) Size (W x L): Max. 8.5 x 11.
Routine Maintenance Page 107 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Routine Maintenance Routine Maintenance This section describes the procedure to replace ink tanks when they run out of ink, to clean the machine when the print result is faint, or to take an action when paper does not feed properly.
Replacing an Ink Tank Page 108 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Routine Maintenance > Replacing an Ink Tank C091 Replacing an Ink Tank When remaining ink cautions or errors occur, the message will appear to inform you of the error. Refer to "An Error Message Is Displayed on the LCD" in " Troubleshooting " of the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide , and take an appropriate action. Note Getting Started .
Replacing an Ink Tank Page 109 of 1135 pages Important Do not place any object on the Document Cover. It will fall into the Rear Tray when the Document Cover is opened and cause the machine to malfunction. Be sure to lift the Scanning Unit (Cover) with the Document Cover closed. When opening or closing the Scanning Unit (Cover), do not touch the buttons on the Operation Panel. Doing so may result in an unexpected operation. Do not touch the metallic parts or other parts inside the machine.
Replacing an Ink Tank Important Handle the ink tanks carefully. Do not drop or apply excessive pressure to them. If the orange tape remains on the L-shape air hole (C), ink may splash or the machine may not print properly. (2) Hold the ink tank with the orange protective cap (D) pointing up while being careful not to block the L-shape air hole (C). (3) Slowly twist the orange protective cap (D) 90 degrees horizontally to remove it off.
Replacing an Ink Tank Page 111 of 1135 pages Do not push the sides of the ink tank. If you push the sides of the ink tank with the L-shape air hole (C) blocked, ink may splash. Do not touch the inside of the orange protective cap (D) or the open ink port (E). The ink may stain your hands if you touch them. Do not reattach the protective cap (D) once you have removed it. Discard it according to the local laws and regulations regarding disposal of consumables. 5. Install the new ink tank.
Replacing an Ink Tank Page 112 of 1135 pages When you start printing after replacing the ink tank, the machine starts cleaning the Print Head automatically. Do not perform any other operations until the machine completes the cleaning of the Print Head. If printed ruled lines are misaligned or the print head position is misaligned, adjust the print head position. See Aligning the Print Head . The machine may make noise during operation.
Checking the Ink Status Page 113 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Routine Maintenance > Replacing an Ink Tank > Checking the Ink Status C092 Checking the Ink Status You can check the ink status on the LCD or with the ink lamps. With the LCD on the Machine (1) Make sure that the power is turned on, and touch the HOME button. The HOME screen will appear. (2) Select Setup on the HOME screen. See Selecting Menus on the HOME Screen . The Setup menu screen will appear.
Checking the Ink Status Page 114 of 1135 pages Flashing slowly (at around 3-second intervals) ...... Repeats Ink tank is running low. Prepare a new ink tank. Flashing fast (at around 1-second intervals) ...... Repeats - The ink tank is installed in the wrong position. Or - The ink has run out. Make sure that the ink tank is installed in the correct position as indicated by the label on the Print Head Holder.
When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect Page 115 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Routine Maintenance > When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect C093 When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect If print results are blurred or colors are not printed correctly, the print head nozzles are probably clogged. Follow the procedure below to print the nozzle check pattern, check the print head nozzle condition, then clean the Print Head.
When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect Page 116 of 1135 pages Note You can also perform the maintenance operations from your computer. For details, refer to the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide .
Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern Page 117 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide Contents > Routine Maintenance > When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect Pattern Troubleshooting > Printing the Nozzle Check C094 Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern Print the nozzle check pattern to determine whether the ink ejects properly from the print head nozzles. Note If the remaining ink level is low, the nozzle check pattern will not be printed correctly. Replace the ink tank whose ink is low.
Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern Page 118 of 1135 pages Page top
Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern Page 119 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide Contents > Routine Maintenance > When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect Pattern Troubleshooting > Examining the Nozzle Check C095 Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern Examine the nozzle check pattern, and clean the Print Head if necessary. 1. Check if there are missing lines in the pattern (1) or horizontal white streaks in the pattern (2).
Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern Page 120 of 1135 pages (2) Confirm the message and touch the OK button. The screen will return to the Maintenance screen. Note Touch the HOME button to exit Setup and display the HOME screen. For (B) (lines are missing or horizontal white streaks are present) in (1) or (2), or in both (1) and (2): (1) The cleaning is required. Select Also B and touch the OK button. The cleaning confirmation screen will appear. (2) Select Yes and touch the OK button.
Cleaning the Print Head Page 121 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide Contents > Routine Maintenance > When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect Troubleshooting > Cleaning the Print Head C096 Cleaning the Print Head Clean the Print Head if lines are missing or if horizontal white streaks are present in the printed nozzle check pattern. Cleaning unclogs the nozzles and restores the print head condition. Cleaning the Print Head consumes ink, so clean the Print Head only when necessary.
Cleaning the Print Head Page 122 of 1135 pages If the problem is not resolved after cleaning the Print Head twice, clean the Print Head deeply. See Cleaning the Print Head Deeply .
Cleaning the Print Head Deeply Page 123 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide Contents > Routine Maintenance > When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect Troubleshooting > Cleaning the Print Head Deeply C097 Cleaning the Print Head Deeply If print quality does not improve by the standard cleaning of the Print Head, clean the Print Head deeply. Cleaning the Print Head deeply consumes more ink than the standard cleaning of the Print Head, so clean the Print Head deeply only when necessary.
Cleaning the Print Head Deeply Page 124 of 1135 pages If a particular color is not printed properly, replace the ink tank of that color. See Replacing an Ink Tank . If the problem is not resolved, turn off the power and clean the Print Head deeply again after 24 hours. If the problem is still not resolved, the Print Head may be damaged. Contact the service center. Note Touch the HOME button to exit Setup and display the HOME screen.
Aligning the Print Head Page 125 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide Contents > Routine Maintenance > When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect Troubleshooting > Aligning the Print Head C098 Aligning the Print Head If printed ruled lines are misaligned or print results are otherwise unsatisfactory, adjust the print head position.
Aligning the Print Head Page 126 of 1135 pages The confirmation screen will appear. (4) Select Yes, and touch the OK button. The print head alignment sheet will be printed and the print head position will be adjusted automatically. This takes about 4 minutes 30 seconds. Note Touch the HOME button to exit Setup and display the HOME screen. If the automatic adjustment of the print head position has failed, the error message "Auto head align has failed." appears on the LCD.
Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller Page 127 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Routine Maintenance > Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller C099 Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller If the Paper Feed Roller is dirty or paper powder is attached to it, paper may not be fed properly. In this case, clean the Paper Feed Roller. Cleaning will wear out the Paper Feed Roller, so perform this only when necessary. You need to prepare: three sheets of A4 or Letter-sized plain paper 1.
Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller Page 128 of 1135 pages (3) When the completion message appears, touch the OK button. The screen will return to the Maintenance screen. Note Touch the HOME button to exit Setup and display the HOME screen. If the problem is not resolved after cleaning the Paper Feed Roller, contact the service center.
Cleaning the Pad in the Cassette Page 129 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Routine Maintenance > Cleaning the Pad in the Cassette C100 Cleaning the Pad in the Cassette If the Pad in the Cassette is smeared with paper powder or dirt, two or more sheets of paper may be ejected. Follow the procedure below to clean the Pad in the Cassette. You need to prepare: cotton swab 1. Pull out the Cassette from the machine, and remove all the papers. 2.
Appendix Page 130 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Appendix Appendix Legal Limitations on Use of Your Product and Use of Images Tips on How to Use Your Machine Page top
Legal Limitations on Use of Your Product and Use of Images Advanced Guide Page 131 of 1135 pages Troubleshooting Contents > Appendix > Legal Limitations on Use of Your Product and Use of Images Legal Limitations on Use of Your Product and Use of Images It may be unlawful to make copies of, scan, print, or use reproductions of the following documents. The list provided is non-exhaustive. When in doubt, check with a legal representative in your jurisdiction.
Tips on How to Use Your Machine Page 132 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Appendix > Tips on How to Use Your Machine C112 Tips on How to Use Your Machine This section introduces the tips on how to use your machine and for printing with optimal quality. Ink is used for various purposes. How is ink used for various purposes other than printing? Ink may be used for purposes other than printing.
Tips on How to Use Your Machine Page 133 of 1135 pages After printing large quantities of paper or performing borderless printing, the area where papers go through may get smeared with ink. Clean the inside of your machine with the Bottom Plate Cleaning. Refer to the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide . Tip!: Check how to load the paper correctly! Is the paper loaded in the correct orientation? When loading paper in the Rear Tray or Cassette, make sure the orientation of paper.
Tips on How to Use Your Machine Page 134 of 1135 pages If the machine is used or transported vertically or slanted, the machine may become damaged or ink may leak from the machine. Be sure not to use or transport the machine vertically or slanted. Tip!: Do not place any object on the Document Cover! Do not place any object on the Document Cover. It will fall into the Rear Tray when the Document Cover is opened and cause the machine to malfunction.
Tips on How to Use Your Machine Page 135 of 1135 pages To disconnect the power plug, be sure to follow this procedure. Print periodically! Just as the tip of a felt pen becomes dry and unusable if it has not been used for a long time, even if it is capped, the Print Head too, may become dried or clogged if the machine has not been used for a long time. We recommend you to use the machine at least once a month.
MG8100 series Advanced Guide Page 136 of 1135 pages MC-5201-V1.
MG8100 series Advanced Guide Page 137 of 1135 pages Selecting a Photo Editing Printing Correcting and Enhancing Photos Using the Auto Photo Fix Function Using the Red-Eye Correction Function Using the Face Brightener Function Using the Face Sharpener Function Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function Using the Blemish Remover Function Adjusting Images Correct/Enhance Images Window Creating Still Images from Videos Video Frame Capture/Movie Print Window Downloading Images from Photo Sharing Sites Import P
MG8100 series Advanced Guide Page 138 of 1135 pages Saving Setting Holidays Setting Calendar Display Opening Saved Files What Is Easy-PhotoPrint Pro? Printing Beautiful Photos Printing with ICC Profiles (Adobe RGB, sRGB) Printing with Canon's Unique Color Tones Let's Start Printing with Easy-PhotoPrint Pro Starting Easy-PhotoPrint Pro Selecting a Photo Selecting the Paper and Layout Printing Adjust the Colors of Photo Printing Photos in Grayscale Adjusting the Color Balance Adjusting Color Balance Using
MG8100 series Advanced Guide Page 139 of 1135 pages Setting Paper Dimensions (Custom Size) Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method Printing a Color Document in Monochrome Adjusting Tone Specifying Color Correction Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver Printing with ICC Profiles Adjusting Color Balance Adjusting Brightness Adjusting Intensity Adjusting Contrast Simulating an Ill
MG8100 series Advanced Guide Page 140 of 1135 pages print) Printing Photos with Print Shooting Information (Captured info print) Printing ID Photo (ID photo size print) Creating a Calendar (Calendar print) Printing Photo on the Disc Label Using the Slide Show Function How to use the Slide Show Function Printing Documents (PDF File) Printing Documents (PDF File) Saved on a Memory Card/ USB Flash Drive Printing Photo from Printed Photo or Film (Photo reprint) Printing from Printed Photo or Film Setting Ite
MG8100 series Advanced Guide Page 141 of 1135 pages Scanning with Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Saving Scanned Data on the Memory Card/USB Flash Drive Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Deleting Scanned Data on Memory Card/USB Flash Drive Forwarding Scanned Data to the Computer Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Attaching the Scanned Data Using the Operation Panel of the Machine to E-mail Setting Items on the Operation Panel of the Machine Appendix: Various Scan Settings Network Scan
MG8100 series Advanced Guide Page 142 of 1135 pages Photos/Documents (Platen) Screen (Scan/Import Window) Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents) Film Screen (Scan/Import Window) Scan Settings Dialog Box (Film) Save Dialog Box Save as PDF file Dialog Box PDF Settings Dialog Box Memory Card Screen (Scan/Import Window) View & Use Window Create/Edit PDF file Window Print Document Dialog Box Print Photo Dialog Box Send via E-mail Dialog Box Correct/Enhance Images Window One-click Mode Screen Auto Scan
MG8100 series Advanced Guide Page 143 of 1135 pages Correcting Images (Unsharp Mask, Reduce Dust and Scratches, Fading Correction, etc.
MG8100 series Advanced Guide Page 144 of 1135 pages Copying Thick Originals Such as Books (Frame erase copy) Copying the Label Side of Disc Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Troubleshooting If an Error Occurs The Machine Cannot Be Powered On An Error Message Is Displayed on the LCD LCD Cannot Be Seen At All An Unintended Language Is Displayed on the LCD Cannot Install the MP Drivers Cannot Install the Application Program Easy-PhotoPrint Pro Does Not Start up or EasyPhotoPrint Pro Menu Does Not Appear Ea
MG8100 series Advanced Guide Page 145 of 1135 pages Duplex Printing In Other Cases Message Appears on the Computer Screen Error Number: B200 A printer error has occurred. Turn the printer off and unplug the power cord of the printer from the power supply. Then contact the service center. Is Displayed Error Number: **** A printer error has occurred. Turn the printer off and then on again. If this doesn't clear the error, see the user's guide for more detail.
MG8100 series Advanced Guide Page 146 of 1135 pages Software Problems E-mail Software Program You Want to Use Does Not Appear in the Screen for Selecting an E-mail Software Program Scanned Image Is Printed Enlarged (Reduced) Scanned Image Is Enlarged (Reduced) on the Computer Monitor Scanned Image Does Not Open MP Navigator EX Problems Cannot Scan at the Correct Size Position or Size of the Image Cannot be Detected Correctly When Scanning Using the Operation Panel Document Is Placed Correctly, but the Sca
How to Use This Manual Page 147 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > How to Use This Manual How to Use This Manual Operating the Contents Pane Operating the Explanation Window Printing This Manual Using Keywords to Find a Document Registering Documents to My Manual Symbols Used in This Document Trademarks and Licenses Page top
Operating the Contents Pane Page 148 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > How to Use This Manual > Operating the Contents Pane Operating the Contents Pane When you click a document title displayed in the contents pane found to the left of the on-screen manual, the documents of that title are displayed in the explanation window on the right side. When you click found to the left of , the document titles found in the lower hierarchies are displayed. Note Click to close or display the contents pane.
Operating the Explanation Window Page 149 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > How to Use This Manual > Operating the Explanation Window Operating the Explanation Window Explanation Window (1) Click the green characters to jump to the corresponding document. (2) The cursor jumps to the top of this document. Window Used in Operation Explanation This on-screen manual describes with a window displayed when the Windows 7 operating system Home Premium (called Windows 7 below) is used.
Printing This Manual Advanced Guide > How to Use This Manual > Printing This Manual Printing This Manual Click to display the print pane to the left of the on-screen manual. Note Click to close or display the print pane. When you click and then click Page Setup, the Page Setup dialog box appears. You can then easily set up the paper to be used for printing. Click , and then click Print Settings to display the Print dialog box.
Printing This Manual Print All Documents Note You can select the type to be printed, and then easily specify print settings on the Print Setup tab. Print Current Document You can print the currently displayed document. 1. From Select Target, select Current Document The title of the currently displayed document is displayed in the Documents to Be Printed list. Note By selecting Print linked documents, you can also print documents that are linked to the current document.
Printing This Manual Page 152 of 1135 pages Confirm the number of pages to be printed, and then click Yes. All documents with selected check boxes are printed. Print My Manual You can select and print documents registered in My Manual. For details about My Manual, see " Registering Documents to My Manual ." 1. From Select Target, select My Manual The titles of the documents that have been registered to My Manual are displayed in the Documents to Be Printed list. 2.
Printing This Manual Page 153 of 1135 pages Confirm the number of pages to be printed, and then click Yes. All documents are printed. Important A large amount of paper is necessary to print all documents. Before printing, be sure to check the number of print pages displayed in the Print Page Count Confirmation dialog box. The Print Preview dialog box allows you to scale the printing to the paper width or to set the zoom rate.
Using Keywords to Find a Document Advanced Guide > How to Use This Manual > Using Keywords to Find a Document Using Keywords to Find a Document You can enter a keyword to search for a target document. All documents in the currently displayed on-screen manual are searched. 1. Click The search pane is displayed to the left of the on-screen manual. Note Click to close or display the search pane. 2. Enter a keyword In Keyword, enter a keyword for the item to be checked.
Using Keywords to Find a Document Page 155 of 1135 pages The search is started, and the titles of documents containing the keyword are displayed in the search results list. When you execute a search by entering multiple keywords, the search results are displayed as shown below.
Registering Documents to My Manual Advanced Guide > How to Use This Manual > Registering Documents to My Manual Registering Documents to My Manual Register frequently read documents as My Manual documents so that you can refer to those documents easily at any time. 1. Display the document Display the document to be added to My Manual. 2. Click The My Manual pane is displayed to the left of the on-screen manual. Note Click to close or display the My Manual pane. 3.
Registering Documents to My Manual Page 157 of 1135 pages 4. Display My Manual When you double-click (or select and press Enter key) a document title displayed in List of My Manual, that document is displayed in the explanation window. Note To delete a document from List of My Manual, select that document title from the list, and then click Delete (or press Delete key).
Symbols Used in This Document Page 158 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > How to Use This Manual > Symbols Used in This Document Symbols Used in This Document Warning Instructions that, if ignored, could result in death or serious personal injury caused by incorrect operation of the equipment. These must be observed for safe operation. Caution Instructions that, if ignored, could result in personal injury or material damage caused by incorrect operation of the equipment.
Trademarks and Licenses Page 159 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > How to Use This Manual > Trademarks and Licenses Trademarks and Licenses Microsoft is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. Windows is a trademark or registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries. Windows Vista is a trademark or registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.
Printing from a Computer Page 160 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer Printing from a Computer Printing with the Bundled Application Software Printing with Other Application Software Page top
Printing with the Bundled Application Software Page 161 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software Printing with the Bundled Application Software What Is Easy-PhotoPrint EX? Printing Photos Creating an Album Printing Labels on Discs Printing Calendars Printing Stickers Printing Layout Printing Premium Content Correcting and Enhancing Photos Creating Still Images from Videos Downloading Images from Photo Sharing Sites Questions and Answers P
What Is Easy-PhotoPrint EX? Page 162 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > What Is Easy-PhotoPrint EX? A000 What Is Easy-PhotoPrint EX? Easy-PhotoPrint EX allows you to create albums, calendars and stickers easily using photos taken with digital cameras. You can also print borderless photos easily. Important Easy-PhotoPrint EX can only be used with Canon inkjet printers.
What Is Easy-PhotoPrint EX? MP Navigator EX Ver.1.00 or later supports the following functions. - Photo Print - Album ZoomBrowser EX Ver.6.0 or later supports the following functions. - Photo Print - Album ZoomBrowser EX Ver.5.8 or later supports the following function. - Album Digital Photo Professional Ver.3.2 or later supports the following function.
What Is Easy-PhotoPrint EX? Page 164 of 1135 pages Note (Question Mark). The thumbnails of files in unsupported formats are displayed as When Easy-PhotoPrint EX is started from Digital Photo Professional, all image files supported by Digital Photo Professional will be displayed. File Formats (Extensions) Supported by Easy-PhotoPrint EX Easy-PhotoPrint EX Photo Print file (.el6) Easy-PhotoPrint EX Album file (.el1) Easy-PhotoPrint EX Stickers file (.el2) Easy-PhotoPrint EX Calendar file (.
Printing Photos Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Photos A010 Printing Photos Easy-PhotoPrint EX allows you to print your favorite photos in a variety of layouts. You can also create borderless photos easily. Corrections suitable for photos can be applied automatically when printing. Steps 1. Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX 2. Selecting a Photo 3. Selecting the Paper 4.
Printing Photos Page 166 of 1135 pages Questions and Answers How Can I Move (or Copy) the Saved File? Which Side of the Displayed Image Does the Printing Start from? How Do I Print with Even Margins? Page top
Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX Page 167 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Photos > Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX A011 Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX 1. From the Start menu, select All Programs > Canon Utilities > Easy-PhotoPrint EX > Easy-PhotoPrint EX. Easy-PhotoPrint EX starts and Menu appears.
Selecting a Photo Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Photos > Selecting a Photo A012 Selecting a Photo 1. Click Photo Print from Menu. The Select Images screen appears. Important The thumbnails (reduced images) displayed in the screen may appear as follows: - A black line appears along an edge of the image. - An edge of the image appears cropped.
Selecting a Photo Page 169 of 1135 pages 3. Click the image you want to print. The number of copies appears as "1" below the clicked image, while the selected image itself will appear in the selected image area. Note To delete an image in the selected image area, select the image you want to delete and click (Delete Imported Image). To delete all images from the selected image area, click To print two or more copies of an image, click (Delete All Imported Images).
Selecting the Paper Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software Selecting the Paper Page 170 of 1135 pages > Printing Photos > A013 Selecting the Paper 1. Click Select Paper. The Select Paper screen appears. 2. Set the following items according to the printer and paper to be used: Printer Paper Source Paper Size Media Type Note The paper sizes and media types may vary depending on the printer. See Help for details.
Selecting the Paper Page 171 of 1135 pages Printing Vivid Photos Reducing Photo Noise See Help for details on the Select Paper screen.
Printing Page 172 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Photos > Printing A014 Printing 1. Click Layout/Print. The Layout/Print screen appears. Important The thumbnails (reduced images) displayed in the screen may appear as follows: - A black line appears along an edge of the image. - An edge of the image appears cropped.
Printing Page 173 of 1135 pages If you select Bordered (Margin 45) from the layouts, images will be reduced when printing to allow a 1.77 inches (45 mm) margin at the top and bottom edges relative to the printing direction. The photo print settings will be discarded if you exit Easy-PhotoPrint EX without saving the settings. It is recommended that you save the printed image if you want to print it again.
Creating an Album Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Creating an Album A020 Creating an Album Easy-PhotoPrint EX allows you to create your own personalized photo album. Steps 1. Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX 2. Selecting the Paper and Layout 3. Selecting a Photo 4. Editing 5.
Creating an Album Page 175 of 1135 pages Questions and Answers How Can I Move (or Copy) the Saved File? What Is "C1" or "C4"? Page top
Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX Page 176 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Creating an Album > Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX A021 Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX 1. From the Start menu, select All Programs > Canon Utilities > Easy-PhotoPrint EX > Easy-PhotoPrint EX. Easy-PhotoPrint EX starts and Menu appears.
Selecting the Paper and Layout Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software Selecting the Paper and Layout Page 177 of 1135 pages > Creating an Album > A022 Selecting the Paper and Layout 1. Click Album from Menu. The Page Setup screen appears. 2. Set the following items in the General Settings section: Paper Size Orientation Cover Double page album Page number Note See Help on the paper size that can be selected.
Selecting the Paper and Layout Page 178 of 1135 pages 4. If you want to change the layout, click Layout.... The Change Layout dialog box appears. In the Change Layout dialog box, you can change the layout or select whether to print the date (on which the picture was taken) on the photo. Note The layouts that can be selected may vary depending on the Paper Size, Orientation, Double page album, or the type of page selected (front cover, inside pages or back cover).
Selecting a Photo Page 179 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Creating an Album > Selecting a Photo A023 Selecting a Photo 1. Click Select Images. The Select Images screen appears. 2. Select the folder that contains the image you want to print from the folder tree area. The images in the folder will be displayed as thumbnails (miniatures).
Selecting a Photo Page 180 of 1135 pages The selected image(s) is (are) displayed in the selected image area. You can also select the image(s) you want to print by dragging it (them) into the selected image area. Note To delete an image in the selected image area, select the image you want to delete and click (Delete Imported Image). To delete all images from the selected image area, click (Delete All Imported Images). Note You can correct or enhance the selected image before printing.
Editing Page 181 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Creating an Album > Editing A024 Editing 1. Click Edit. The Edit screen appears. 2. Edit your album if necessary.
Editing Page 182 of 1135 pages C3: Inside the back cover C4: Back cover "C2"/"C3" appears only when the Leave the inside of front cover blank/Leave the inside of back cover blank checkbox is selected in the Cover Options dialog box. Saving Note See Help for details on the Edit screen.
Printing Page 183 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Creating an Album > Printing A025 Printing 1. Click Print Settings. The Print Settings screen appears. 2. Set the following items according to the printer and paper to be used: Printer Media Type Copies Paper Source Print Quality Borderless Printing Note The media types may vary depending on the printer and the paper size.
Printing Page 184 of 1135 pages 3. Click Print. Note See Help for details on the Print Settings screen.
Printing Labels on Discs Page 185 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Labels on Discs A004 Printing Labels on Discs Start Easy-PhotoPrint EX and select Disc Label in Menu to start CD-LabelPrint. CD-LabelPrint allows you to print labels on printable discs (BDs, DVDs, CDs, etc.) easily. For details on how to use CD-LabelPrint, install CD-LabelPrint and refer to the application's manual as follows.
Printing Calendars Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Calendars A040 Printing Calendars Easy-PhotoPrint EX allows you to create your own calendar using your favorite photos. Steps 1. Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX 2. Selecting the Paper and Layout 3. Selecting a Photo 4. Editing 5.
Printing Calendars Page 187 of 1135 pages Opening Saved Files Questions and Answers How Can I Move (or Copy) the Saved File? Page top
Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX Page 188 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Calendars > Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX A041 Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX 1. From the Start menu, select All Programs > Canon Utilities > Easy-PhotoPrint EX > Easy-PhotoPrint EX. Easy-PhotoPrint EX starts and Menu appears.
Selecting the Paper and Layout Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software Selecting the Paper and Layout Page 189 of 1135 pages > Printing Calendars > A042 Selecting the Paper and Layout 1. Click Calendar from Menu. The Page Setup screen appears. 2. Set the following items in the General Settings section: Paper Size Orientation Start from Period Note See Help on the paper size that can be selected. You can add holidays to your calendar.
Selecting the Paper and Layout Page 190 of 1135 pages Note See Help for details on the Page Setup screen.
Selecting a Photo Page 191 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Calendars > Selecting a Photo A043 Selecting a Photo 1. Click Select Images. The Select Images screen appears. 2. Select the folder that contains the image you want to print from the folder tree area. The images in the folder will be displayed as thumbnails (miniatures). Note You can also use still images captured from videos.
Selecting a Photo Page 192 of 1135 pages Note You can correct or enhance the selected image before printing. Correcting and Enhancing Photos See Help for details on the Select Images screen.
Editing Page 193 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Calendars > Editing A044 Editing 1. Click Edit. The Edit screen appears. 2. Edit the calendar if necessary.
Editing Page 194 of 1135 pages See Help for details on the Edit screen.
Printing Page 195 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Calendars > Printing A045 Printing 1. Click Print Settings. The Print Settings screen appears. 2. Set the following items according to the printer and paper to be used: Printer Media Type Copies Paper Source Print Quality Borderless Printing Note The media types may vary depending on the printer and the paper size.
Printing Page 196 of 1135 pages 3. Click Print. Note See Help for details on the Print Settings screen.
Printing Stickers Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Stickers A050 Printing Stickers You can print your favorite photos on compatible sticker sheets. Steps 1. Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX 2. Selecting the Paper and Layout 3. Selecting a Photo 4. Editing 5.
Printing Stickers Page 198 of 1135 pages Page top
Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX Page 199 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Stickers > Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX A051 Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX 1. From the Start menu, select All Programs > Canon Utilities > Easy-PhotoPrint EX > Easy-PhotoPrint EX. Easy-PhotoPrint EX starts and Menu appears.
Selecting the Paper and Layout Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software Selecting the Paper and Layout Page 200 of 1135 pages > Printing Stickers > A052 Selecting the Paper and Layout 1. Click Stickers from Menu. The Page Setup screen appears. 2. Set the following items in the General Settings section: Paper Size Orientation Print date Use the same image in all frames Note Paper sizes other than Photo Stickers cannot be selected.
Selecting a Photo Page 201 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Stickers > Selecting a Photo A053 Selecting a Photo 1. Click Select Images. The Select Images screen appears. 2. Select the folder that contains the image you want to print from the folder tree area. The images in the folder will be displayed as thumbnails (miniatures). Note You can also use still images captured from videos.
Selecting a Photo Page 202 of 1135 pages Note You can correct or enhance the selected image before printing. Correcting and Enhancing Photos See Help for details on the Select Images screen.
Editing Page 203 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Stickers > Editing A054 Editing 1. Click Edit. The Edit screen appears. 2. Edit the stickers if necessary.
Printing Page 204 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Stickers > Printing A055 Printing 1. Click Print Settings. The Print Settings screen appears. 2. Set the following items according to the printer and paper to be used: Printer Media Type Copies Paper Source Print Quality Borderless Printing Note The media types may vary depending on the printer and the paper size.
Printing Page 205 of 1135 pages See Help for details on the Print Settings screen.
Printing Layout Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Layout A150 Printing Layout You can add text to your favorite photos and print them in a variety of layouts. Steps 1. Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX 2. Selecting the Paper and Layout 3. Selecting a Photo 4. Editing 5.
Printing Layout Page 207 of 1135 pages How Can I Move (or Copy) the Saved File? Page top
Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX Page 208 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Layout > Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX A151 Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX 1. From the Start menu, select All Programs > Canon Utilities > Easy-PhotoPrint EX > Easy-PhotoPrint EX. Easy-PhotoPrint EX starts and Menu appears.
Selecting the Paper and Layout Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software Selecting the Paper and Layout Page 209 of 1135 pages > Printing Layout > A152 Selecting the Paper and Layout 1. Click Layout Print from Menu. The Page Setup screen appears. 2. Set the following items in the General Settings section: Paper Size Orientation Print date Note See Help on the paper size that can be selected. You can customize the date (position, size, color, etc.
Selecting the Paper and Layout Page 210 of 1135 pages Page top
Selecting a Photo Page 211 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Layout > Selecting a Photo A153 Selecting a Photo 1. Click Select Images. The Select Images screen appears. 2. Select the folder that contains the image you want to print from the folder tree area. The images in the folder will be displayed as thumbnails (miniatures). Note You can also use still images captured from videos.
Selecting a Photo Page 212 of 1135 pages Note You can correct or enhance the selected image before printing. Correcting and Enhancing Photos See Help for details on the Select Images screen.
Editing Page 213 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Layout > Editing A154 Editing 1. Click Edit. The Edit screen appears. 2. Edit the layout if necessary.
Editing Page 214 of 1135 pages Page top
Printing Page 215 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Layout > Printing A155 Printing 1. Click Print Settings. The Print Settings screen appears. 2. Set the following items according to the printer and paper to be used: Printer Media Type Copies Paper Source Print Quality Borderless Printing Note The media types may vary depending on the printer and the paper size.
Printing Page 216 of 1135 pages 3. Click Print. Note See Help for details on the Print Settings screen.
Printing Premium Content Page 217 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Premium Content A180 Printing Premium Content Use Easy-PhotoPrint EX to edit and print content downloaded from the Canon website. Important This function is supported under Windows XP or later. Keep these points in mind when using PREMIUM Contents Print. To print with Easy-PhotoPrint EX, you need to download and install the exclusive content.
Printing Premium Content Page 218 of 1135 pages Saving Opening Saved Files Questions and Answers How Can I Move (or Copy) the Saved File? Page top
Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX Page 219 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Premium Content > Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX A181 Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX 1. From the Start menu, select All Programs > Canon Utilities > Solution Menu EX, then click Solution Menu EX. Solution Menu EX starts. 2. Select Photo Print, then click the PREMIUM Contents Print icon.
Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX Page 220 of 1135 pages Note In the actual screen, layouts for the selected Contents Type are displayed instead of the gray area shown above. Alternatively, select Canon Web Service of Solution Menu EX and click the PREMIUM Contents Print icon to start Easy-PhotoPrint EX. Important PREMIUM Contents Print is not displayed in Menu of Easy-PhotoPrint EX. To print premium content, start Easy-PhotoPrint EX from Solution Menu EX following the steps above.
Selecting the Paper and Layout Page 221 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Premium Content > Selecting the Paper and Layout A182 Selecting the Paper and Layout 1. Set the following items in the General Settings section of the Page Setup screen. Paper Size Contents Type When Content Other than Calendars is Selected for Contents Type 2. Select a layout from Layouts.
Selecting the Paper and Layout Page 222 of 1135 pages Note You can specify the display style of the days of the week in the Calendar Settings dialog box. To display the Calendar Settings dialog box, click Advanced.... Note See Help for details on the Page Setup screen.
Selecting a Photo Page 223 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Premium Content > Selecting a Photo A183 Selecting a Photo Important The Select Images screen is not displayed depending on the selected content. In that case, skip ahead to " Editing ." 1. Click Select Images. The Select Images screen appears. Note In the actual screen, images are displayed instead of the gray area shown above. 2.
Selecting a Photo 4. Select the image(s) you want to print and click Page 224 of 1135 pages (Import to Inside Pages). The selected image(s) is (are) displayed in the selected image area. You can also select the image(s) you want to print by dragging it (them) into the selected image area. Note To delete an image in the selected image area, select the image you want to delete and click (Delete Imported Image). To delete all images from the selected image area, click (Delete All Imported Images).
Editing Page 225 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Premium Content > Editing A184 Editing Important The Edit screen is not displayed depending on the selected content. In that case, skip ahead to " Printing ." 1. Click Edit. The Edit screen appears. Note In the actual screen, the content you are creating is displayed instead of the gray areas shown above. 2. Edit the content if necessary.
Editing Page 226 of 1135 pages The edit information will be discarded if you exit Easy-PhotoPrint EX without saving the edited item. It is recommended that you save the item if you want to edit it again. Saving Note See Help for details on the Edit screen.
Printing Page 227 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Premium Content > Printing A185 Printing 1. Click Print Settings. The Print Settings screen appears. Note In the actual screen, the content you created is displayed instead of the gray area shown above. 2.
Printing Page 228 of 1135 pages 3. Click Print. Note See Help for details on the Print Settings screen.
Correcting and Enhancing Photos Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Correcting and Enhancing Photos A060 Correcting and Enhancing Photos You can correct and enhance images. (Correct/Enhance Images) in the Select Images or Edit screen, or in the Layout/Print screen of Click Photo Print. You can make the following corrections and enhancements in the Correct/Enhance Images window.
Correcting and Enhancing Photos Page 230 of 1135 pages You can also blur the outline of the subjects or remove the base color.
Using the Auto Photo Fix Function Page 231 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Correcting and Enhancing Photos > Using the Auto Photo Fix Function A066 Using the Auto Photo Fix Function This function will automatically analyze the captured scene and apply suitable corrections. Important The Auto Photo Fix function is not available for Photo Print.
Using the Auto Photo Fix Function Page 232 of 1135 pages The image appears in Preview. Note If only one image is selected, the thumbnail list does not appear below Preview. 3. Make sure that Auto is selected. 4. Click Auto Photo Fix, then click OK. The entire photo is corrected automatically and the the upper left of the image. (Correction/Enhancement) mark appears on Note Click (Compare) to display the images before and after the correction side by side so that you can compare and check the result.
Using the Red-Eye Correction Function Page 233 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Correcting and Enhancing Photos > Using the Red-Eye Correction Function A061 Using the Red-Eye Correction Function You can correct red eyes caused by a camera flash. You can perform the Red-Eye Correction function either automatically or manually. Note Photo Print allows you to automatically correct red eyes when printing.
Using the Red-Eye Correction Function Page 234 of 1135 pages Auto Correction 3. Make sure that Auto is selected. 4. Click Red-Eye Correction. 5. Click OK. Red eyes are corrected and the the image. (Correction/Enhancement) mark appears on the upper left of Important Areas other than the eyes may be corrected depending on the image. Note Click (Compare) to display the images before and after the correction side by side so that you can compare and check the result.
Using the Red-Eye Correction Function Red eye is corrected and the image. Page 235 of 1135 pages (Correction/Enhancement) mark appears on the upper left of the Note Click (Compare) to display the images before and after the correction side by side so that you can compare and check the result. Click Undo to undo the preceding correction operation. 6. Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images. You can save corrected images as new files.
Using the Face Brightener Function Page 236 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Correcting and Enhancing Photos > Using the Face Brightener Function A062 Using the Face Brightener Function You can brighten dark faces caused by bright background. Note You can brighten dark photos caused by bright background automatically by selecting Auto Photo Fix.
Using the Face Brightener Function Page 237 of 1135 pages 3. Click Manual, then click Correct/Enhance. 4. Click Face Brightener. Note Effect levels can be changed using the slider below Face Brightener. Move the cursor over the image. The shape of the cursor changes to (Cross). 5. Drag to select the area you want to correct, then click OK that appears over the image.
Using the Face Brightener Function Page 238 of 1135 pages Important The corrections will be lost if you exit before saving corrected images.
Using the Face Sharpener Function Page 239 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Correcting and Enhancing Photos > Using the Face Sharpener Function A063 Using the Face Sharpener Function You can sharpen out-of-focus faces in a photo. You can perform the Face Sharpener function either automatically or manually. 1. Select photos in the Select Images screen, then click (Correct/Enhance Images).
Using the Face Sharpener Function Page 240 of 1135 pages 4. Click Face Sharpener. Note Effect levels can be changed using the slider below Face Sharpener. 5. Click OK. The face is sharpened and the image. (Correction/Enhancement) mark appears on the upper left of the Note Click (Compare) to display the images before and after the correction side by side so that you can compare and check the result. Click Reset Selected Image to undo the correction operation.
Using the Face Sharpener Function The facial area in and around the selected area is sharpened and the Enhancement) mark appears on the upper left of the image. Page 241 of 1135 pages (Correction/ Note You can also drag to rotate the selected area. Click (Compare) to display the images before and after the correction side by side so that you can compare and check the result. Click Undo to undo the preceding correction operation. 6. Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images.
Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function Page 242 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Correcting and Enhancing Photos > Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function A064 Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function You can enhance skin beautifully by removing blemishes and wrinkles. You can perform the Digital Face Smoothing function either automatically or manually. 1.
Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function Page 243 of 1135 pages 4. Click Digital Face Smoothing. Note Effect levels can be changed using the slider below Digital Face Smoothing. 5. Click OK. Skin is enhanced beautifully and the of the image. (Correction/Enhancement) mark appears on the upper left Note Click (Compare) to display the images before and after the enhancement side by side so that you can compare and check the result. Click Reset Selected Image to undo the enhancement operation.
Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function Skin in and around the selected area is enhanced beautifully and the mark appears on the upper left of the image. Page 244 of 1135 pages (Correction/Enhancement) Note You can also drag to rotate the selected area. Click (Compare) to display the images before and after the enhancement side by side so that you can compare and check the result. Click Undo to undo the preceding enhancement operation. 6. Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images.
Using the Blemish Remover Function Page 245 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Correcting and Enhancing Photos > Using the Blemish Remover Function A065 Using the Blemish Remover Function You can remove moles. 1. Select photos in the Select Images screen, then click (Correct/Enhance Images). The Correct/Enhance Images window appears.
Using the Blemish Remover Function Page 246 of 1135 pages Note Move the cursor over the image. The shape of the cursor changes to (Cross). 5. Drag to select the area you want to enhance, then click OK that appears over the image. Moles in and around the selected area are removed and the appears on the upper left of the image. (Correction/Enhancement) mark Note Click (Compare) to display the images before and after the enhancement side by side so that you can compare and check the result.
Adjusting Images Page 247 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Correcting and Enhancing Photos > Adjusting Images A067 Adjusting Images You can make fine adjustments to the overall brightness, contrast, etc. of images. 1. Select photos in the Select Images screen, then click (Correct/Enhance Images). The Correct/Enhance Images window appears.
Adjusting Images Page 248 of 1135 pages Contrast Sharpness Blur Show-through Removal Note Click (Compare) to display the images before and after the adjustment side by side so that you can compare and check the result. Click Advanced to make fine adjustments to the image brightness and color tone. See " Advanced " in the descriptions of the Correct/Enhance Images window for details. Click Defaults to reset all adjustments. 5. Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images.
Correct/Enhance Images Window Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Correcting and Enhancing Photos > Correct/Enhance Images Window A068 Correct/Enhance Images Window You can correct/enhance images in this window. (Correct/Enhance Images) in the Select To display the Correct/Enhance Images window, click Images or Edit screen, or in the Layout/Print screen of Photo Print.
Correct/Enhance Images Window Page 250 of 1135 pages Auto Photo Fix Applies automatic corrections suitable for photos. Important The Auto Photo Fix function is not available for Photo Print. Photo Print allows you to automatically apply suitable corrections to all photos when printing, by selecting Enable Auto Photo Fix in Color correction for printing on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box. To display the Preferences dialog box, click Preferences... from the File menu.
Correct/Enhance Images Window Automatically corrects/enhances all images displayed in the thumbnail list. OK Applies the selected effect to the selected image or all images. Reset Selected Image Cancels all corrections and enhancements applied to the selected image. Save Selected Image Saves the corrected/enhanced image (the selected one). Save All Corrected Images Saves all the corrected/enhanced images displayed in the thumbnail list. Exit Click to close the Correct/Enhance Images window.
Correct/Enhance Images Window Removes show-through of text from the reverse side or removes the base color. Adjust the showthrough level to prevent text on the reverse side of thin document or the base color of the document from appearing on the image. Move the slider to the right to increase the show-through removal effect. Advanced Opens the Advanced Adjustment dialog box in which you can make fine adjustments to the image brightness and color tone.
Correct/Enhance Images Window color tone are adjusted in the Advanced Adjustment dialog box. Defaults Resets each adjustment (brightness, contrast, sharpness, blur, and show-through removal). Reset Selected Image Cancels all corrections, enhancements and adjustments applied to the selected image. Save Selected Image Saves the corrected/enhanced/adjusted image (the selected one). Save All Corrected Images Saves all the corrected/enhanced/adjusted images displayed in the thumbnail list.
Correct/Enhance Images Window Page 254 of 1135 pages Removes moles in the selected area. OK Applies the selected effect to the specified area. Undo Cancels the latest correction/enhancement. Reset Selected Image Cancels all corrections, enhancements and adjustments applied to the selected image. Save Selected Image Saves the corrected/enhanced/adjusted image (the selected one). Save All Corrected Images Saves all the corrected/enhanced/adjusted images displayed in the thumbnail list.
Creating Still Images from Videos Page 255 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Creating Still Images from Videos A160 Creating Still Images from Videos You can capture video frames and create still images. Important This function is supported under Windows XP SP2 or later. However, it is not supported under the 64-bit editions of Windows XP. This function is not available when ZoomBrowser EX Ver.6.
Creating Still Images from Videos Page 256 of 1135 pages Note Only MOV format videos recorded with Canon digital cameras are displayed. The selected video plays. 3. Select the video from which you want to capture still images and click OK. The selected video plays in Preview of the Video Frame Capture window. Note (Pause) appears while a video plays, and video is stopped. (Pause) and Use the frame you want to capture. (Playback) appears while a (Frame backward/Frame advance) to display 4.
Creating Still Images from Videos Page 257 of 1135 pages (Set start time/Set end time) in Display the Auto Frame Capture Settings area, then use the Preview area to specify the time range. In the Auto Frame Capture Settings area, select a capture method and click Capture. You can correct the captured still images in the Correct Captured Frames window. To display the Correct Captured Frames window, select the image(s) you want to correct in the Captured frame(s) area, then click (Correct image).
Video Frame Capture/Movie Print Window Page 258 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Creating Still Images from Videos > Video Frame Capture/Movie Print Window A161 Video Frame Capture/Movie Print Window You can capture video frames and create still images in these windows. In the Movie Print window, you can print the captured still images. Important This function is supported under Windows XP SP2 or later.
Video Frame Capture/Movie Print Window Print Area You can print the captured still images. Note This function is available only when the Movie Print window is displayed via Solution Menu EX. Media Type Displays the media type specified in the Print Settings dialog box. Page Size Displays the paper size specified in the Print Settings dialog box. Print Settings Displays the Print Settings dialog box in which you can make the basic print settings (select printer/ media, etc.).
Video Frame Capture/Movie Print Window Page 260 of 1135 pages Select Video Displays the Select Video dialog box. Select a folder, then select the video from which you want to capture still images. Save Saves the still images selected in the Captured frame(s) area. Exit Click to close the Video Frame Capture/Movie Print window. (2) Preview Area The video selected in the Select Video dialog box appears in Preview. (Frame backward/Frame advance) Click to reverse/advance one frame and pause.
Video Frame Capture/Movie Print Window When you select an image, a checkmark appears in its checkbox. (Clear all check-marks) Cancels all image selections in the Captured frame(s) area. (Correct image) Displays the Correct Captured Frames window in which you can correct all the images selected in the Captured frame(s) area. Note When a frame in which the subject or camera has moved significantly is captured, the image may not be corrected properly.
Video Frame Capture/Movie Print Window Page 262 of 1135 pages (2) Toolbar (Reduce/Enlarge frame) Reduces or enlarges the displayed image. (Whole frame) Displays the entire image in Preview. (Compare) Displays the Compare Captured Frames window. You can compare the images before and after the correction side by side. The image before the correction is displayed on the left, and the image after the correction is displayed on the right of the window.
Downloading Images from Photo Sharing Sites Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Downloading Images from Photo Sharing Sites A170 Downloading Images from Photo Sharing Sites You can search for images on photo sharing sites on the Internet and download the images you want to print. Important Internet connection is required to use this function. Internet connection fees apply.
Downloading Images from Photo Sharing Sites Page 264 of 1135 pages (Add Image). When you click (Import photos from photo sharing sites), a message about created works and personality rights appear. To hide the message, select the Do not show this message again checkbox. See "Import Photos from Photo Sharing Sites Window " for details on the Import Photos from Photo Sharing Sites window. 2. Enter the search text in Search. 3. Set Sort by, Number of Results per Page and License Type. 4. Click Start Search.
Import Photos from Photo Sharing Sites Window Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software from Photo Sharing Sites > Import Photos from Photo Sharing Sites Window Page 265 of 1135 pages > Downloading Images A171 Import Photos from Photo Sharing Sites Window In this window, you can search for images on photo sharing sites on the Internet and download the images you want to print. Important Internet connection is required to use this function.
Import Photos from Photo Sharing Sites Window Sort by Select how to sort the search results in the Thumbnail window. Select Popularity or Date. You cannot change the setting after a search. Number of Results per Page Select the number of images displayed in the Thumbnail window, from 10, 20 and 30. You cannot change the setting after a search. License Type Select the license type of images to search for, from All types, CC license (Non-Commercial) and CC license (Others).
Import Photos from Photo Sharing Sites Window Commercial work along with your creation. - You may not use the work for commercial purposes. - Even if your creation is built upon the work of others, you must apply the same conditions to it as those set out for the original work by the licensor. Share Alike (CC license) CC license (Others) Attribution (CC - You must show the title and licensor of the original work along with your creation.
Import Photos from Photo Sharing Sites Window Page 268 of 1135 pages thumbnail. To select an image, click the thumbnail or checkbox. Important Due to limitations of photo sharing sites, if the search results exceed 4,000 images, the same images as those displayed in the page containing the 4,001st image will be displayed in all the subsequent pages.
Questions and Answers Page 269 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Questions and Answers A200 Questions and Answers How Can I Move (or Copy) the Saved File? Which Side of the Displayed Image Does the Printing Start from? How Do I Print with Even Margins? What Is "C1" or "C4"? Page top
How Can I Move (or Copy) the Saved File? Page 270 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Questions and Answers > How Can I Move (or Copy) the Saved File? A095 How Can I Move (or Copy) the Saved File? If you want to move (or copy) a file created and saved with Easy-PhotoPrint EX from one folder to another, you need to move (or copy) the folder that was automatically created when originally saving that file as well.
Which Side of the Displayed Image Does the Printing Start from? Page 271 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Questions and Answers > Which Side of the Displayed Image Does the Printing Start from? A096 Which Side of the Displayed Image Does the Printing Start from? As shown below, printing starts from the left side of the image displayed in the Layout/Print screen. Outputs the paper in the direction as the arrow indicates.
How Do I Print with Even Margins? Page 272 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Questions and Answers > How Do I Print with Even Margins? A097 How Do I Print with Even Margins? When you print on a bordered layout, the margins on the left and right or the top and bottom may become wider than the other, depending on the image and printer.
What Is "C1" or "C4"? Page 273 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Questions and Answers > What Is "C1" or "C4"? A098 What Is "C1" or "C4"? When an album is printed, labels such as "C1" and "C4" are printed as page numbers. The "C1" and "C4" represent the front cover and back cover, respectively.
Photo Print Settings Page 274 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Photo Print Settings A101 Photo Print Settings Printing Labels on Discs Directly Printing Photos in Grayscale Printing Vivid Photos Reducing Photo Noise Cropping Photos (Photo Print) Printing Dates on Photos (Photo Print) Printing Multiple Photos on One Page Printing an Index Printing ID Photos (ID Photo Print) Printing Photo Information Saving Photos Opening Saved F
Printing Labels on Discs Directly Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software Printing Labels on Discs Directly Page 275 of 1135 pages > Photo Print Settings > A070 Printing Labels on Discs Directly You can print labels on printable discs using Photo Print. If you want to edit the details, return to Menu and select Disc Label and edit/print using CD-LabelPrint. See " Printing Labels on Discs" for details.
Printing Labels on Discs Directly Page 276 of 1135 pages 3. Select a layout you want to use. 4. Enter the title(s) and specify the details of the layout in Advanced. Note Items that can be set may vary depending on the selected layout. 5. Click Print. Follow the message to load a printable disc, then start printing. Printing starts from the top of the image displayed in Preview. Note You can adjust the printing position on the printable disc in the Adjust dialog box.
Printing Photos in Grayscale Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software Printing Photos in Grayscale Page 277 of 1135 pages > Photo Print Settings > A094 Printing Photos in Grayscale Select the Grayscale Photo checkbox in the Select Paper screen to print photos in grayscale. Important Vivid Photo is not available when the Grayscale Photo checkbox is selected. White streaks may appear at the top and bottom edges of grayscale photos.
Printing Photos in Grayscale Page 278 of 1135 pages Note When the Grayscale Photo checkbox is selected, preview images appear in grayscale in the Layout/ Print screen. However, they appear in color in the Correct/Enhance Images window. In the Adjust Grayscale window, you can adjust the black color tone of grayscale photos. To display the Adjust Grayscale window , select the Grayscale Photo checkbox in the Select Paper screen and click (Adjust Grayscale) in the Layout/Print screen. See Help for details.
Printing Vivid Photos Page 279 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Photo Print Settings > Printing Vivid Photos A071 Printing Vivid Photos Select the Vivid Photo checkbox in the Select Paper screen to boost the colors in a photo before printing. Important This function is available only with a printer that supports Vivid Photo.
Reducing Photo Noise Page 280 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Photo Print Settings > Reducing Photo Noise A072 Reducing Photo Noise When a photo is taken in a dark location such as night scene using digital camera, noise may appear in the image. Select the Photo Noise Reduction checkbox in the Select Paper screen to reduce noise in the image and make the printed photos more vivid.
Cropping Photos (Photo Print) Page 281 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Photo Print Settings > Cropping Photos (Photo Print) A073 Cropping Photos (Photo Print) Cropping a photo is the act of removing the unnecessary portions of the photo by selecting the necessary portions. Click (Crop Image) in the Layout/Print screen or double-click the preview image.
Cropping Photos (Photo Print) Page 282 of 1135 pages Page top
Printing Dates on Photos (Photo Print) Page 283 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Photo Print Settings > Printing Dates on Photos (Photo Print) A074 Printing Dates on Photos (Photo Print) To print the date the photo was taken on the photo, click (Date Settings) in the Layout/Print screen, then select the Print date checkbox in the Date Settings dialog box. Note The date is displayed in the short date format (mm/dd/yyyy, etc.
Printing Multiple Photos on One Page Page 284 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Photo Print Settings > Printing Multiple Photos on One Page A076 Printing Multiple Photos on One Page You can print multiple photos on one page by selecting a multiple-photo layout in the Layout/Print screen. Note See the following section for details on how to select photos.
Printing an Index Page 285 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Photo Print Settings > Printing an Index A077 Printing an Index You can print an index of selected photos. An index print shows the thumbnails of the photos in one page. It is convenient for managing your photos. To print an index, select Index from the layouts in the Layout/Print screen. Important Index cannot be printed if you select any of the following paper sizes.
Printing an Index To display the Preferences dialog box, click Page 286 of 1135 pages (Settings) or select Preferences... from the File menu.
Printing ID Photos (ID Photo Print) Page 287 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Photo Print Settings > Printing ID Photos (ID Photo Print) A078 Printing ID Photos (ID Photo Print) You can print a variety of ID photos. Important The photo may not qualify as an official ID photo depending on its use. For details, contact the party to whom you will be submitting the photo.
Printing ID Photos (ID Photo Print) To display the Preferences dialog box, click Page 288 of 1135 pages (Settings) or select Preferences... from the File menu. ID photos can only be printed on 4"x6" 10x15cm paper.
Printing Photo Information Page 289 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Photo Print Settings > Printing Photo Information A079 Printing Photo Information You can print the photo and the Exif information side by side. To print them, select Letter 8.5"x11" or A4 for Paper Size in the Select Paper screen, and select Captured Info from the layouts in the Layout/Print screen.
Saving Photos Page 290 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Photo Print Settings > Saving Photos A092 Saving Photos You can save edited photos. The information of cropping and layout can be saved. Click Save in the Layout/Print screen. When the Save As dialog box appears, specify the save location and file name, then click Save. Important If you edit a saved file and save it again, the file will be overwritten.
Opening Saved Files Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software Opening Saved Files Page 291 of 1135 pages > Photo Print Settings > A093 Opening Saved Files You can open files created with Easy-PhotoPrint EX. 1. Click Library from Menu. The Open dialog box appears. You can check files created and saved with Easy-PhotoPrint EX in icon view (only for Windows 7/ Windows Vista) or thumbnail view.
Opening Saved Files Page 292 of 1135 pages Page top
Other Settings Page 293 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings A102 Other Settings Changing Layout Changing Background Adding Photos Swapping Positions of Photos Replacing Photos Changing Position, Angle and Size of Photos Cropping Photos Framing Photos Printing Dates on Photos Attaching Comments to Photos Adding Text to Photos Saving Setting Holidays Setting Calendar Display Opening Saved Files Page top
Changing Layout Page 294 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software Changing Layout > Other Settings > A080 Changing Layout You can change the layout of each page separately. Important For PREMIUM Contents Print, you cannot change the layouts. Select the page you want to change the layout of in the Edit screen, then click (Change Layout). Select the layout you want to use in the Change Layout dialog box and click OK.
Changing Layout Page 295 of 1135 pages Calendar Important The layouts of all pages are changed to the selected layout. All images that do not fit in the new layout will be collected on the last page. Note The layouts that can be selected may vary depending on the Paper Size and Orientation.
Changing Layout Page 296 of 1135 pages Page top
Changing Background Page 297 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software Changing Background > Other Settings > A081 Changing Background You can change the background of each page. Important You cannot change the background of the Stickers, Layout Print and PREMIUM Contents Print. Click Background... in the Page Setup screen or select the page you want to change the background of in the Edit screen, then click (Change Background).
Changing Background Select from samples will be displayed only if Album has been selected. Various backgrounds are available on our website besides those saved in the application. Click Search backgrounds... to access the Canon website from which you can download additional materials for free. Internet connection is required to access the website. Internet connection fees apply. Exit Easy-PhotoPrint EX before installing backgrounds.
Changing Background Page 299 of 1135 pages Note See Help for details on how to set the background in the Change Background dialog box.
Adding Photos Page 300 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings > Adding Photos A082 Adding Photos You can add images to pages. Select the page you want to add photos to in the Edit screen, then click (Add Image). Note The screen(s) for Album printing is (are) used as example(s) in the following descriptions. The screen(s) may vary depending on what you create.
Adding Photos Page 301 of 1135 pages Note In the Add Image dialog box, you can select all images at one time or change the display size and order of the thumbnails. See Help for details.
Swapping Positions of Photos Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software Swapping Positions of Photos Page 302 of 1135 pages > Other Settings > A083 Swapping Positions of Photos You can swap the positions of images. Click (Swap Image Positions) in the Edit screen. Note The screen(s) for Album printing is (are) used as example(s) in the following descriptions. The screen(s) may vary depending on what you create.
Replacing Photos Page 303 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings > Replacing Photos A084 Replacing Photos You can replace an image with another image. Select the image you want to replace in the Edit screen, then click (Replace Selected Image). Note The screen(s) for Album printing is (are) used as example(s) in the following descriptions. The screen(s) may vary depending on what you create.
Replacing Photos Page 304 of 1135 pages Page top
Changing Position, Angle and Size of Photos Page 305 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software Changing Position, Angle and Size of Photos > Other Settings > A085 Changing Position, Angle and Size of Photos You can adjust the position, angle and size of images. Important For PREMIUM Contents Print using premium content images, this function may not be available depending on the selected image.
Changing Position, Angle and Size of Photos For PREMIUM Contents Print, you cannot use See Help for details on the position and size of images. Page 306 of 1135 pages (Free Rotate).
Cropping Photos Page 307 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings > Cropping Photos A086 Cropping Photos Cropping an image is the act of removing the unnecessary portions of the image by selecting the necessary portions. Important For PREMIUM Contents Print using premium content images, this function may not be available depending on the selected image.
Cropping Photos Page 308 of 1135 pages Page top
Framing Photos Page 309 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings > Framing Photos A087 Framing Photos You can add frames to images. Important You cannot add frames to images in Stickers, Layout Print and PREMIUM Contents Print. Select the image you want to frame in the Edit screen and click image. (Edit Image) or double-click the Click the Frame tab in the Edit Image dialog box.
Framing Photos Page 310 of 1135 pages Select the Apply to all images in the page checkbox to add the same frame to all the images on a selected page at one time. Various frames are available on our website besides those saved in the application. Click Search frames... to access the Canon website from which you can download additional materials for free. Internet connection is required to access the website. Internet connection fees apply. Exit Easy-PhotoPrint EX before installing frames. Search frames...
Printing Dates on Photos Page 311 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software Dates on Photos > Other Settings > Printing A088 Printing Dates on Photos You can print dates on images. Important For PREMIUM Contents Print, you cannot print dates. Select the image you want to print the date on in the Edit screen and click click the image. (Edit Image) or double- Click the Date tab in the Edit Image dialog box.
Printing Dates on Photos Page 312 of 1135 pages Note The date is displayed in the short date format (mm/dd/yyyy, etc.) specified in your operating system. See Help for details on setting dates.
Attaching Comments to Photos Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software Attaching Comments to Photos Page 313 of 1135 pages > Other Settings > A089 Attaching Comments to Photos You can attach comments to images and display them in your album. The photo name, shooting date and comments are displayed (from top to bottom) in a comment box. Important You cannot attach comments to Calendar, Stickers, Layout Print and PREMIUM Contents Print.
Attaching Comments to Photos Page 314 of 1135 pages Select the Show comment box checkbox. Select the checkboxes of the items you want to display, and enter comments. Set the size and color of font, and position of the comments, etc., then click OK. Note See Help for details on comments.
Adding Text to Photos Page 315 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software Text to Photos > Other Settings > Adding A090 Adding Text to Photos You can add text to photos. Important For PREMIUM Contents Print, you cannot enter text in the following cases. There is no text box in the selected layout. (Add Text) is disabled. Click (Add Text) in the Edit screen and drag the mouse over the area in which you want to add text.
Adding Text to Photos Page 316 of 1135 pages Page top
Saving Page 317 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings > Saving A091 Saving You can save edited items. Click Save in the Edit or Print Settings screen. Note The screen(s) for Album printing is (are) used as example(s) in the following descriptions. The screen(s) may vary depending on what you create. When the Save As dialog box appears, specify the save location and file name, then click Save.
Setting Holidays Page 318 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings > Setting Holidays A099 Setting Holidays You can add holidays to your calendar. (Setup Period/Holiday) in the Click Set Holidays... in the Page Setup screen of Calendar, or click Edit screen and click Set Holidays... in the Calendar General Settings dialog box to display the Holiday Settings dialog box. To add a holiday, click Add....
Setting Holidays Page 319 of 1135 pages Enter the name in Holiday Name and specify the date. Select the Set as Holiday checkbox to display that day as a holiday in your calendar. Note See Help for details on each dialog box.
Setting Calendar Display Page 320 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings > Setting Calendar Display A100 Setting Calendar Display You can customize the calendar display (fonts, lines, colors, position, size, etc.). Click Settings... in the Page Setup screen of Calendar, or select a calendar in the Edit screen and click (Setup Calendar) to display the Calendar Settings dialog box.
Opening Saved Files Page 321 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings > Opening Saved Files A103 Opening Saved Files You can open files created with Easy-PhotoPrint EX. 1. Click Library from Menu. The Open dialog box appears. You can check files created and saved with Easy-PhotoPrint EX in icon view (only for Windows 7/ Windows Vista) or thumbnail view.
Opening Saved Files Page 322 of 1135 pages Editing Layout Print Note Easy-PhotoPrint EX supports the following file formats (extensions). - Easy-PhotoPrint EX Album file (.el1) - Easy-PhotoPrint EX Stickers file (.el2) - Easy-PhotoPrint EX Calendar file (.el4) - Easy-PhotoPrint EX Layout file (.el5) - Easy-PhotoPrint EX PREMIUM Contents file (.el7) - CD-LabelPrint data (.cld) You can open files created with Easy-PhotoPrint EX with the following methods, besides from Library in Menu.
What Is Easy-PhotoPrint Pro? Page 323 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > What Is Easy-PhotoPrint Pro? A500 What Is Easy-PhotoPrint Pro? Easy-PhotoPrint Pro is a plug-in for Adobe Photoshop, Adobe Photoshop Elements and Digital Photo Professional, an application to process RAW image for Canon digital cameras.
What Is Easy-PhotoPrint Pro? Page 324 of 1135 pages Supported Data Formats One color (8 or 16 bits) per pixel RGB data formats supported by Adobe Photoshop or Adobe Photoshop Elements One color (8 or 16 bits) per pixel RGB data formats supported by Digital Photo Professional General Note The color tone of the image displayed on the display is different from the print result.
Printing Beautiful Photos Page 325 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Beautiful Photos A501 Printing Beautiful Photos Easy-PhotoPrint Pro allows you to print images captured in Adobe RGB or sRGB mode, in colors that are close to their original colors by using ICC profiles. You can also print sRGB images with Canon's unique color tones (Canon Digital Photo Color).
Printing Beautiful Photos Page 326 of 1135 pages by sRGB. What is sRGB? sRGB is an international standard color space, developed for the purpose of unifying the colors of input devices and output devices. What is Canon Digital Photo Color? Canon Digital Photo Color is Canon's unique image processing technology.
Printing with ICC Profiles (Adobe RGB, sRGB) Page 327 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Beautiful Photos > Printing with ICC Profiles (Adobe RGB, sRGB) A502 Printing with ICC Profiles (Adobe RGB, sRGB) By specifying an ICC profile, you can print an image captured in Adobe RGB or sRGB mode by utilizing its original color space, or print in colors that are close to those corrected with Adobe Photoshop, Adobe Photoshop Elemen
Printing with ICC Profiles (Adobe RGB, sRGB) Page 328 of 1135 pages You can also select a specific ICC profile. 6. Select the desired matching method from Rendering Intent. Note Relative Colorimetric: Converts the image to the printer color space in a way that the source colors within the color gamut of the target space are reproduced to the nearest level. Select this when you want to print in colors that are close to the original image.
Printing with Canon's Unique Color Tones Page 329 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Beautiful Photos > Printing with Canon's Unique Color Tones A504 Printing with Canon's Unique Color Tones You can print sRGB images using Canon Digital Photo Color. Note Canon Digital Photo Color is Canon's unique image processing technology.
Printing with Canon's Unique Color Tones Page 330 of 1135 pages 5. Click OK. 6. Click Print. The Print dialog box appears. 7. Click OK. Note You can also change the color balance, brightness and contrast of the image.
Let's Start Printing with Easy-PhotoPrint Pro Page 331 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Let's Start Printing with Easy-PhotoPrint Pro A510 Let's Start Printing with Easy-PhotoPrint Pro Steps 1. Starting Easy-PhotoPrint Pro 2. Selecting a Photo 3. Selecting the Paper and Layout 4.
Starting Easy-PhotoPrint Pro Page 332 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Let's Start Printing with Easy-PhotoPrint Pro > Starting Easy-PhotoPrint Pro A511 Starting Easy-PhotoPrint Pro Easy-PhotoPrint Pro can be started from Adobe Photoshop, Adobe Photoshop Elements or Digital Photo Professional. Starting from Adobe Photoshop or Adobe Photoshop Elements 1.
Starting Easy-PhotoPrint Pro Page 333 of 1135 pages Starting from Digital Photo Professional 1. From the File menu of Digital Photo Professional, select Plug-in printing > Print with Easy-PhotoPrint Pro. Easy-PhotoPrint Pro starts. Important Easy-PhotoPrint Pro cannot be started when no image is displayed in Digital Photo Professional. Note The images displayed in Digital Photo Professional appear in Easy-PhotoPrint Pro.
Selecting a Photo Page 334 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Let's Start Printing with Easy-PhotoPrint Pro > Selecting a Photo A512 Selecting a Photo 1. Check that the photo you want to print is displayed in the page list at the bottom right of the screen. Note To increase the number of copies, click (Up arrow) below the thumbnail in the center of the screen until the number of copies you want is reached.
Selecting the Paper and Layout Page 335 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Let's Start Printing with Easy-PhotoPrint Pro > Selecting the Paper and Layout A513 Selecting the Paper and Layout 1. Set the following items according to the printer and paper to be used: Printer Paper Size Media Type Paper Source Important When Fine Art is selected for Paper Size, a 1.
Selecting the Paper and Layout Page 336 of 1135 pages Important When Plain Paper is selected for Media Type, the print result may be soft. In that case, change Media Type and print again. Note The layouts may vary depending on the printer, paper size, and media type. Note For borderless photos and index prints, you can make advanced settings such as the amount of extension and the arrangement of images. After selecting a layout, click Set... that appears to the right of Layout.
Printing Page 337 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Let's Start Printing with Easy-PhotoPrint Pro > Printing A514 Printing 1. Click Print. The Print dialog box appears. Note You can change the printing order by clicking window. (Specify Print Order) in the Print Preview 2. Click OK. Important If "An error occurred during printing. Memory may be insufficient for printing.
Printing Page 338 of 1135 pages Page top
Adjust the Colors of Photo Page 339 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Adjust the Colors of Photo A520 Adjust the Colors of Photo Printing Photos in Grayscale Adjusting the Color Balance Adjusting Color Balance Using Sample Patterns Adjusting Brightness/Contrast Adjusting Brightness/Contrast Using Sample Patterns Page top
Printing Photos in Grayscale Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Adjust the Colors of Photo > Printing Photos in Grayscale A521 Printing Photos in Grayscale You can print color photos in grayscale photos. Important You may not be able to print with this setting depending on the printer type. 1. Check that the photo you want to print is displayed in the page list at the bottom right of the screen.
Printing Photos in Grayscale Page 341 of 1135 pages Note You can adjust the black color tone in the Color Adjustment dialog box. To display the Color Adjustment dialog box, select the Grayscale Photo checkbox in the Printer Settings window and click Color Adjustment.... See Help for details. 3. Click Print. The Print dialog box appears. 4. Click OK. Important White streaks may appear at the top and bottom edges of grayscale photos. In that case, print with a 1.
Adjusting the Color Balance Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Adjust the Colors of Photo > Adjusting the Color Balance A522 Adjusting the Color Balance You can adjust the color balance of an image. 1. Check that the photo you want to print is displayed in the page list at the bottom right of the screen. Note See "Selecting a Photo " for details on how to select photos. 2. Click Color Adjustment... in the Printer Settings window.
Adjusting the Color Balance Page 343 of 1135 pages Important If the print result after adjusting the color balance is different from the preview image, print a color pattern and adjust the colors again based on the pattern. Adjusting Color Balance Using Sample Patterns The color balance adjustment applies to all images to print. Note Move the slider to the right to increase and left to reduce intensity. 4. Click OK.
Adjusting Color Balance Using Sample Patterns Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Adjust the Colors of Photo > Adjusting Color Balance Using Sample Patterns A523 Adjusting Color Balance Using Sample Patterns You can print a pattern of an image and adjust the color balance of the image based on the pattern. 1. Check that the photo you want to print is displayed in the page list at the bottom right of the screen.
Adjusting Color Balance Using Sample Patterns Page 345 of 1135 pages The Pattern Print window appears. 4. Select Color for Pattern Print, then select the color direction in which you want to adjust. Note Select Print in ALL Directions to print a pattern of the image adjusted in the following six directions. (The image with the current color balance values is printed in the center.) Use the pattern to determine the color direction in which you want to adjust the color balance.
Adjusting Color Balance Using Sample Patterns Page 346 of 1135 pages Print in Direction B (down) : Blue Print in Direction M (lower right) : Magenta Select a specific direction such as Print in Direction R to print a pattern of the image adjusted in the selected direction. (The image with the current color balance values is printed at the bottom left.
Adjusting Color Balance Using Sample Patterns Page 347 of 1135 pages Page top
Adjusting Brightness/Contrast Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Adjust the Colors of Photo > Adjusting Brightness/Contrast A524 Adjusting Brightness/Contrast You can adjust the brightness and contrast of an image. 1. Check that the photo you want to print is displayed in the page list at the bottom right of the screen. Note See "Selecting a Photo " for details on how to select photos. 2. Click Color Adjustment...
Adjusting Brightness/Contrast Page 349 of 1135 pages Important If the print result after adjusting the brightness and contrast is different from the preview image, print a color pattern and adjust the colors again based on the pattern. Adjusting Brightness/Contrast Using Sample Patterns The brightness/contrast adjustment applies to all images to print. Note For Brightness, move the slider to the right to brighten and left to darken the image.
Adjusting Brightness/Contrast Using Sample Patterns Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Adjust the Colors of Photo > Adjusting Brightness/Contrast Using Sample Patterns A525 Adjusting Brightness/Contrast Using Sample Patterns You can print a pattern of an image and adjust the brightness/contrast of the image based on the pattern. 1. Check that the photo you want to print is displayed in the page list at the bottom right of the screen.
Adjusting Brightness/Contrast Using Sample Patterns The Pattern Print window appears. 4. Select Brightness/Contrast for Pattern Print. 5. Select Paper Size, Pattern Size and Parameter Range. Note You can crop the image before printing the pattern. Move the white frame in Preview to change the cropping area. Click Preview... to display the print preview in a different window in which you can check the settings before printing. See Help for details on the Pattern Print window. 6. Click Print.
Adjusting Brightness/Contrast Using Sample Patterns Page 352 of 1135 pages The source image is printed in the center. Brightness increases from bottom to top. Contrast increases from left to right. 7. Click OK. 8. Select the image with the desired brightness/contrast from the printed pattern and enter the values indicated below the image into Brightness and Contrast. 9. Click OK.
Easy-PhotoPrint Pro Settings Page 353 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Easy-PhotoPrint Pro Settings A530 Easy-PhotoPrint Pro Settings Printing Borderless Photos Printing an Index Printing Contact Sheets Printing Advanced Information Cropping Photos Printing with Adjusted Print Size Saving Print Settings Page top
Printing Borderless Photos Page 354 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Easy-PhotoPrint Pro Settings > Printing Borderless Photos A531 Printing Borderless Photos You can print borderless photos by selecting a borderless layout from Layout in the Printer Settings window. Note Select a borderless layout and click Set...
Printing an Index Page 355 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Easy-PhotoPrint Pro Settings > Printing an Index A532 Printing an Index You can print an index of selected photos. An index print shows the thumbnails of the photos in one page. It is convenient for managing your photos. To print an index, select Index for Layout in the Printer Settings window. Important You can print up to 80 images on one page.
Printing Contact Sheets Page 356 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Easy-PhotoPrint Pro Settings > Printing Contact Sheets A533 Printing Contact Sheets You can print an index of photos with a design that looks like negative film strips. To print a contact sheet, select Contact Sheet for Layout in the Printer Settings window. Note Contact sheets can only be printed on Letter 8.5"x11" and A4 paper.
Printing Advanced Information Page 357 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Easy-PhotoPrint Pro Settings > Printing Advanced Information A534 Printing Advanced Information Select the Print advanced info checkbox in the Printer Settings window to print the photo with photo information or color correction information side by side.
Cropping Photos Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Easy-PhotoPrint Pro Settings > Cropping Photos A535 Cropping Photos Cropping a photo is the act of removing the unnecessary portions of the photo by selecting the necessary portions. Click (Crop) in the Print Preview window or double-click the preview image. Drag the white squares on the image to adjust the area to be cropped and click OK.
Cropping Photos Page 359 of 1135 pages See Help for details on the Crop window.
Printing with Adjusted Print Size Page 360 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Easy-PhotoPrint Pro Settings > Printing with Adjusted Print Size A536 Printing with Adjusted Print Size (Specify Print Size) in the Print Preview window to adjust the print size and amount of margin Click before printing. Important Set Printer, Paper Size and Layout before changing the values in Scale, Height, etc. in the Set Print Size dialog box.
Saving Print Settings Page 361 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Easy-PhotoPrint Pro Settings > Saving Print Settings A537 Saving Print Settings You can save frequently used combinations of paper size, media type, color adjustment, etc. as custom profiles. Saved profiles can be loaded from a list. This allows you to print photos instantly with your favorite settings. Click Add...
Printing with Other Application Software Page 362 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software Printing with Other Application Software Various Printing Methods Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data Overview of the Printer Driver Page top
Various Printing Methods Page 363 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods Various Printing Methods Printing with Easy Setup Setting a Page Size and Orientation Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order Setting the Stapling Margin Execute Borderless Printing Fit-to-Page Printing Scaled Printing Page Layout Printing Poster Printing Booklet Printing Duplex Printing Stamp/Background Printing Registering a Stamp Reg
Printing with Easy Setup Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods > Printing with Easy Setup P000 Printing with Easy Setup The simple setup procedure for carrying out appropriate printing on this machine, is as follows: 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Select a frequently used profile In Commonly Used Settings on the Quick Setup tab, select a printing profile suited for the purpose.
Printing with Easy Setup Page 365 of 1135 pages Quick Setup, Main, Page Setup, and Effects tabs are saved, and you can print with the same settings from the next time as well. (Effects tab cannot be used when the XPS printer driver is used.) Click Save... to register the specified settings. For instructions on registering settings, see " Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile .
Setting a Page Size and Orientation Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods > Setting a Page Size and Orientation P400 Setting a Page Size and Orientation The paper size and orientation are essentially determined by the application. When the page size and orientation set for Page Size and Orientation on the Page Setup tab are same as those set with the application, you do not need to select them on the Page Setup tab.
Setting a Page Size and Orientation Page 367 of 1135 pages Page top
Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods > Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order P001 Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order The procedure for specifying the number of copies and printing order is as follows: You can also set the number of copies on the Quick Setup tab. 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2.
Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order Print from Last Page: /Collate： Print from Last Page: /Collate： Page 369 of 1135 pages 4. Complete the setup Click OK. When you execute print, the specified number of copies will be printed with the specified printing order. Important When the application software that you used to create the document has the same function, give priority to the printer driver settings.
Setting the Stapling Margin Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods > Setting the Stapling Margin P002 Setting the Stapling Margin The procedure for setting the staple side and the margin width is as follows: 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Specify the side to be stapled Check the position of the stapling margin from Staple Side on the Page Setup tab.
Setting the Stapling Margin Page 371 of 1135 pages Note The printer automatically reduces the print area depending on the staple position margin. 4. Complete the setup Click OK on the Page Setup tab. When you execute print, the data is printed with the specified staple side and margin width. Important Staple Side and Specify Margin... appear grayed out and are unavailable when: Borderless, Poster, or Booklet is selected for Page Layout.
Execute Borderless Printing Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods > Execute Borderless Printing P003 Execute Borderless Printing The borderless printing function allows you to print data without any margin by enlarging the data so that it extends slightly off the paper. Without the borderless printing function, a margin is provided around the printed data.
Execute Borderless Printing 3. Check the paper size Check the Page Size list. When you want to change, select another page size from the list. The list displays only sizes that can be used for borderless printing. 4. Adjust the amount of extension from the paper If necessary, adjust the amount of extension using the Amount of Extension slider. Moving the slider to the right increases the amount extending off the paper, and moving the slider to the left decreases the amount.
Execute Borderless Printing Page 374 of 1135 pages When Preview before printing is checked on the Main tab, you can confirm whether there will be no border before printing.
Fit-to-Page Printing Page 375 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods > Fitto-Page Printing P004 Fit-to-Page Printing The procedure for printing a document that is automatically enlarged or reduced to fit the page size to be used is as follows: 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Set fit-to-page printing Select Fit-to-Page from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab. 3.
Fit-to-Page Printing Page 376 of 1135 pages The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver. 5. Complete the setup Click OK. When you execute print, the document will be enlarged or reduced to fit to the page size.
Scaled Printing Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods > Scaled Printing P005 Scaled Printing The procedure for printing a document with pages enlarged or reduced is as follows: 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Set scaled printing Select Scaled from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab. 3. Select the paper size for the data Using Page Size, select the page size that is set with your application. 4.
Scaled Printing Specify a scaling factor Directly type in a value into the Scaling box. The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver. 5. Complete the setup Click OK. When you execute print, the document will be printed with the specified scale. Important When the application software which you created the original has the scaled printing function, configure the settings on your application software.
Scaled Printing Page 379 of 1135 pages Selecting Scaled changes the printable area of the document.
Page Layout Printing Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software Page Layout Printing Page 380 of 1135 pages > Various Printing Methods > P006 Page Layout Printing The page layout printing function allows you to print more than one page image on a single sheet of paper. The procedure for performing page layout printing is as follows: 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2.
Page Layout Printing Page 381 of 1135 pages Pages To change the number of pages to be printed on a single sheet of paper, select the number of pages from the list. You can also set 2-Page Print or 4-Page Print on the Quick Setup tab. Page Order To change the page arrangement order, select an icon from the list to change the page placement order. Page Border To print a page border around each document page, check this check box. 5. Complete the setup Click OK on the Page Setup tab.
Poster Printing Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods > Poster Printing P401 Poster Printing The poster printing function allows you to enlarge image data, divide it into several pages, and print these pages on separate sheets of paper. When the pages are pasted together, they form a large print like a poster. The procedure for performing poster printing is as follows: Setting Poster Printing 1.
Poster Printing 4. Set the number of image divisions and the pages to be printed If necessary, click Specify..., specify the following settings in the Poster Printing dialog box, and then click OK. Image Divisions Select the number of divisions (vertical x horizontal). As the number of divisions increases, the number of sheets used for printing increases, allowing you to create a larger poster. Print "Cut/Paste" in margins To leave out words "Cut" and "Paste", uncheck this check box.
Poster Printing Page 384 of 1135 pages Note Click the deleted pages to display them again. Right-click the settings preview to select Print all pages or Delete all pages. 2. Complete the setup After completing the page selection, click OK. When you execute print, only specified pages will be printed. Important When Poster is selected, the Duplex Printing, Staple Side and Print from Last Page appear grayed out and are unavailable.
Booklet Printing Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods > Booklet Printing P402 Booklet Printing The booklet printing function allows you to print data for a booklet. Data is printed on both sides of the paper. This type of printing ensures that pages can be collated properly, in page number order, when the printed sheets are folded and stapled at the center. The procedure for performing booklet printing is as follows: 1.
Booklet Printing Page 386 of 1135 pages Margin for stapling Select which side should the stapling margin be on when the booklet is completed. Insert blank page To leave one side of a sheet blank, check the check box, and select the page to be left blank. Margin Enter the margin width. The specified width from the center of the sheet becomes the margin width for one page. Page Border To print a page border around each document page, check the check box. 5.
Duplex Printing Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods > Duplex Printing P007 Duplex Printing The procedure for printing data on both sides of a sheet of paper is as follows: You can also set duplex printing in Additional Features on the Quick Setup tab. Performing Automatic Duplex Printing You can perform the duplex printing without having to turn over the paper. 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2.
Duplex Printing Use normal-size printing Print without reducing the page. Use reduced printing Reduce the page slightly during printing. 5. Specify the side to be stapled The machine analyzes the Orientation and Page Layout settings, and automatically selects the best Staple Side. When you want to change the setting, select another value from the list. 6. Set the margin width If necessary, click Specify Margin... and set the margin width, and then click OK. 7.
Duplex Printing Page 389 of 1135 pages Select Normal-size (or Fit-to-Page, Scaled or Page Layout) from the Page Layout list. 4. Specify the side to be stapled The machine analyzes the Orientation and Page Layout settings, and automatically selects the best Staple Side. When you want to change the setting, select another value from the list. 5. Set the margin width If necessary, click Specify Margin... and set the margin width, and then click OK. 6. Complete the setup Click OK on the Page Setup tab.
Stamp/Background Printing Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software Stamp/Background Printing Page 390 of 1135 pages > Various Printing Methods > P403 Stamp/Background Printing Stamp or Background may be unavailable when certain printer drivers are used. The Stamp function allows you to print a stamp text or a bitmap over or behind document data. It also allows you to print date, time and user name.
Stamp/Background Printing With the XPS printer driver, the Stamp/Background... button has become the Stamp... button and only the stamp function can be used. 3. Select a stamp Check the Stamp check box, and select the stamp to be used from the list. The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the Page Setup tab. 4. Set the stamp details If necessary, specify the following settings, and then click OK. Define Stamp...
Stamp/Background Printing Page 392 of 1135 pages 5. Complete the setup Click OK on the Page Setup tab. When you execute print, the data is printed with the specified background. Important When Borderless is selected, the Stamp/Background... (Stamp...) button appears grayed out and is unavailable. Note The stamp and background are not printed on blank sheets inserted with the Insert blank page function of booklet printing.
Registering a Stamp Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods > Stamp/Background Printing > Registering a Stamp P404 Registering a Stamp This feature may be unavailable when certain printer drivers are used. You can create and register a new stamp. You can also change and register some of the settings of an existing stamp. Unnecessary stamps can be deleted at any time.
Registering a Stamp 3. Click Define Stamp... The Stamp Settings dialog box opens. 4. Configure the stamp while viewing the preview window Stamp tab Select Text, Bitmap, or Date/Time/User Name that matches your purpose for Stamp Type. For Text registration, the characters must already be entered in Stamp Text. If necessary, change the TrueType Font, Style, Size, and Outline settings. You can select the color of the stamp by clicking Select Color.... For Bitmap, click Select File...
Registering a Stamp Page 395 of 1135 pages Check the Stamp check box in the Stamp/Background (Stamp) dialog box, and then select the title of the stamp to be changed from the Stamp list. 2. Click Define Stamp... The Stamp Settings dialog box opens. 3. Configure the stamp while viewing the preview window 4. Overwrite save the stamp Click Save overwrite on the Save settings tab. When you want to save the stamp with a different title, type a new title in the Title box and click Save.
Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods > Stamp/Background Printing > Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background P405 Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background This feature may be unavailable when certain printer drivers are used. You can select a bitmap file (.bmp) and register it as a new background.
Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background and Background cannot be used. 3. Click Select Background... The Background Settings dialog box opens. 4. Select the image data to be registered to the background Click Select File.... Select the target bitmap file (.bmp), and then click Open. 5. Specify the following settings while viewing the preview window Layout Method Select how the background image data is to be placed. When Custom is selected, you can set coordinates for X-Position and Y-Position.
Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background Page 398 of 1135 pages 4. Save the background Click Save overwrite on the Save settings tab. When you want to save the background with a different title, enter a new title in the Title box and click Save. Click OK when the confirmation message appears. 5. Complete the setup Click OK. The Stamp/Background dialog box opens again. The registered title appears in the Background list. Deleting an Unnecessary Background 1. Click Select Background...
Printing an Envelope Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software Printing an Envelope Page 399 of 1135 pages > Various Printing Methods > P406 Printing an Envelope If you are using the XPS printer driver, replace "Canon IJ Status Monitor" with "Canon IJ XPS Status Monitor" when reading this information. For details on how to load an envelope into the machine, refer to "Loading Paper" in the manual: Basic Guide.
Printing an Envelope Page 400 of 1135 pages 105x235mm, or Youkei 6 98x190mm, and then click OK. 5. Set the orientation To print the addressee horizontally, select Landscape for Orientation. 6. Select the print quality Select High or Standard that matches your purpose for Print Quality. 7. Complete the setup Click OK. When you execute print, the information is printed on the envelope. Important When you execute envelope printing, guide messages are displayed.
Switching the Paper Source to Match the Purpose Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods > Switching the Paper Source to Match the Purpose P008 Switching the Paper Source to Match the Purpose In this machine, there are two paper sources, a rear tray and a cassette. You can facilitate printing by selecting a paper source setting that matches your print conditions or purpose.
Switching the Paper Source to Match the Purpose Page 402 of 1135 pages When printing a large volume of data, load plain paper of the same size in both the rear tray and the cassette. The printer then automatically switches the paper source when paper runs out in one paper source, thus reducing the work of reloading paper. Important Continuous Autofeed is unavailable when paper other than Plain Paper is selected for Media Type.
Displaying the Print Results before Printing Page 403 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods > Displaying the Print Results before Printing P009 Displaying the Print Results before Printing If you are using the XPS printer driver, replace "Canon IJ Status Monitor" with "Canon IJ XPS Status Monitor" when reading this information. You can display and check the print result before printing.
Setting Paper Dimensions (Custom Size) Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods > Setting Paper Dimensions (Custom Size) P010 Setting Paper Dimensions (Custom Size) You can specify the height and width of paper when its size cannot be selected from the Page Size. Such a paper size is called "custom size.
Setting Paper Dimensions (Custom Size) Page 405 of 1135 pages 4. Set the custom paper size Specify Units, and enter the Width and Height of the paper to be used. Then click OK. 5. Complete the setup Click OK on the Page Setup tab. When you execute print, the data is printed with the specified paper size.
Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data Page 406 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method Printing a Color Document in Monochrome Adjusting Tone Specifying Color Correction Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data Interpreting the ICC Profile Adjusting Colo
Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Me... Page 407 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data > Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method P011 Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method You can individually set the combined representation method for the print quality level and the halftoning method.
Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Me... Page 408 of 1135 pages 3. Setting the print quality and halftone expression method Move the Quality slider to select the quality level. Select the expression method in Halftoning and click OK. Note Halftones refer to color shades between the darkest color and the brightest color. The printer replaces the color shades with a collection of small dots to express the halftones.
Printing a Color Document in Monochrome Page 409 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data > Printing a Color Document in Monochrome P012 Printing a Color Document in Monochrome The procedure for printing a color document in monochrome is as follows: You can also set a grayscale printing in Additional Features on the Quick Setup tab. 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2.
Printing a Color Document in Monochrome Page 410 of 1135 pages Note During Grayscale Printing, gray ink or color inks may be used as well as black ink.
Adjusting Tone Page 411 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data > Adjusting Tone P045 Adjusting Tone When printing black and white photos, you can produce the cooling effects of cool colors and the warming effects of warm colors. Tone is set to Cool Tone is set to standard Tone is set to Warm The procedure for adjusting tone is as follows: 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2.
Adjusting Tone Page 412 of 1135 pages Moving the Tone slider to the right brings out the warm colors (Warm), and moving it to the left brings out the cool colors (Cool). You can also directly enter a value linked to the slider. Enter a value in the range from -50 to 50. After adjusting the tones, click OK. 6. Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab. When you execute print, the color document is converted to grayscale data with adjusted tones. It allows you to print the color document in monochrome.
Specifying Color Correction Page 413 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data > Specifying Color Correction P013 Specifying Color Correction You can specify the color correction method suited to the type of document to be printed. Normally, the printer driver adjusts the colors by using Canon Digital Photo Color so that data is printed with color tints that most people prefer.
Specifying Color Correction Page 414 of 1135 pages Driver Matching By using Canon Digital Photo Color, you can print sRGB data with color tints that most people prefer. Driver Matching is the default setting for color correction. ICM/ICC Profile Matching Adjusts the colors by using an ICC profile when printing. Specify the input profile to be used. None The printer driver does not perform color correction.
Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data Page 415 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data > Specifying Color Correction > Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data P014 Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data When people print images taken with digital cameras, they sometimes feel that the printed color tones differ from those of actual image or those displayed on the monitor.
Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver Page 416 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data > Specifying Color Correction > Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver P015 Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver You can specify the color correction function of the printer driver to print sRGB data with color tints that most people prefer through the use of Canon Digital Photo Color.
Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver Page 417 of 1135 pages 6. Set the other items If necessary, click Color Adjustment tab, and adjust the color balance (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow) and adjust Brightness, Intensity, and Contrast settings, and then click OK. 7. Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab. When you execute print, the printer driver adjusts the colors when printing the data.
Printing with ICC Profiles Page 418 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data > Specifying Color Correction > Printing with ICC Profiles P016 Printing with ICC Profiles When the image data has a specified input ICC profile, you can print by using the color space (Adobe RGB or sRGB) of the data effectively.
Printing with ICC Profiles Page 419 of 1135 pages 5. Select color correction Click Matching tab, and select None for Color Correction. 6. Set the other items If necessary, click Color Adjustment tab, and adjust the color balance (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow) and adjust Brightness, Intensity, and Contrast settings, and then click OK. 7. Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab. When you execute print, the printer uses the color space of the image data.
Printing with ICC Profiles 3. Select the print quality For Print Quality, select High, Standard, or Fast according to your purpose. 4. Select the manual color adjustment Select Manual for Color/Intensity, and click Set.... Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens. 5. Select color correction Click Matching tab, and select ICM or ICC Profile Matching for Color Correction. 6. Select the input profile Select an Input Profile that matches the color space of the image data.
Printing with ICC Profiles Page 421 of 1135 pages Select Adobe RGB (1998). Important When the application software specifies an input profile, the input profile setting of the printer driver becomes invalid. When no input ICC profiles are installed on your computer, Adobe RGB (1998) will not be displayed. You can install ICC profiles from the Setup CD-ROM that accompanies the machine. 7. Select the rendering intent Select the coloring adjustment method in Rendering Intent.
Adjusting Color Balance Page 422 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data > Adjusting Color Balance P017 Adjusting Color Balance You can adjust the color tints when printing. Since this function adjusts color balance of the output by changing the ink ratios of each color, it changes the total color balance of the document.
Adjusting Color Balance Page 423 of 1135 pages 3. Adjust color balance There are individual sliders for Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow. Each color becomes stronger when the corresponding slider is moved to the right, and becomes weaker when the corresponding slider is moved to the left. For example, when cyan becomes weaker, the color red becomes stronger. You can also directly enter a value linked to the slider. Enter a value in the range from -50 to 50.
Adjusting Brightness Page 424 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data > Adjusting Brightness P018 Adjusting Brightness You can change the brightness of the overall image data during printing. This function does not change pure white or pure black but it changes the brightness of the intermediate colors. The following sample shows the print result when the brightness setting is changed.
Adjusting Brightness Page 425 of 1135 pages 4. Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab. When you execute print, the data is printed at the specified brightness.
Adjusting Intensity Page 426 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data > Adjusting Intensity P019 Adjusting Intensity You can dilute (brighten) or intensify (darken) the colors of the overall image data during printing. The following sample shows the case when the intensity is increased so that all colors become more intense when the image data is printed.
Adjusting Intensity Page 427 of 1135 pages Important Adjust the slider gradually. 4. Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab. When you execute print, the image data is printed with the adjusted intensity.
Adjusting Contrast Page 428 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data > Adjusting Contrast P020 Adjusting Contrast You can adjust the image contrast during printing. To make the differences between the light and dark portions of images greater and more distinct, increase the contrast.
Adjusting Contrast Page 429 of 1135 pages After adjusting each color, click OK. Important Adjust the slider gradually. 4. Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab. When you execute print, the image is printed with the adjusted contrast.
Simulating an Illustration Page 430 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data > Simulating an Illustration P021 Simulating an Illustration This feature is unavailable when the XPS printer driver is used. With the Simulate Illustration function, you can print full-color or 256-color image data so that it looks like a hand-drawn illustration.
Representing Image Data with a Single Color Page 431 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data > Representing Image Data with a Single Color P022 Representing Image Data with a Single Color This feature is unavailable when the XPS printer driver is used. With the Monochrome Effects function, you can benefit from coloring effects such as changing a photograph to a sepia tone image.
Representing Image Data with a Single Color Page 432 of 1135 pages Important When the Grayscale Printing check box on the Main tab is checked, Monochrome Effects appears grayed out and is unavailable.
Presenting Image Data with Vivid Colors Page 433 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data > Presenting Image Data with Vivid Colors P023 Presenting Image Data with Vivid Colors This feature is unavailable when the XPS printer driver is used. The Vivid Photo function allows you to print image data with vivid colors.
Smoothing Jagged Outlines Page 434 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data > Smoothing Jagged Outlines P407 Smoothing Jagged Outlines This feature is unavailable when the XPS printer driver is used. The Image Optimizer function reduces the jagged outlines that are produced when photos and graphics are enlarged with your application. It allows you to print smooth outlines.
Smoothing Jagged Outlines Page 435 of 1135 pages It may take longer to complete printing when the image optimizer is used.
Changing Color Properties to Improve Coloration Page 436 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data > Changing Color Properties to Improve Coloration P408 Changing Color Properties to Improve Coloration This feature is unavailable when the XPS printer driver is used. The Photo Optimizer PRO function corrects colors of digital camera images or scanned images.
Changing Color Properties to Improve Coloration Page 437 of 1135 pages Click OK. When you execute print, the printer corrects the photo coloring and prints out the photos. Important Photo Optimizer PRO does not function when: Background is set in the Stamp/Background dialog box on the Page Setup tab. Define Stamp... is selected in the Stamp/Background dialog box on the Page Setup tab, and the bitmapped stamp is configured. Note Depending on images, the Photo Optimizer PRO may have no discernible effect.
Reducing Photo Noise Page 438 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data > Reducing Photo Noise P024 Reducing Photo Noise This feature is unavailable when the XPS printer driver is used. With the Photo Noise Reduction function, you can reduce the digital camera noise and improve the image quality of the digital print. The procedure for performing Photo Noise Reduction is as follows: 1.
Reducing Photo Noise Page 439 of 1135 pages Note It is recommended to select Normal for most cases. Select Strong if you have selected Normal and the noise still bothers you. Depending on application software or resolution of image data, effects of digital camera noise reduction may not be obvious. When this function is used for other than photos taken by digital cameras, image may be distorted.
Overview of the Printer Driver Page 440 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Overview of the Printer Driver Overview of the Printer Driver Printer Driver Operations Canon IJ Printer Driver XPS Printer Driver How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window Maintenance Tab Canon IJ Status Monitor Canon IJ Preview Page top
Printer Driver Operations Page 441 of 1135 pages MA-6873-V1.
Canon IJ Printer Driver Page 442 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Overview of the Printer Driver > Canon IJ Printer Driver P025 Canon IJ Printer Driver The Canon IJ printer driver is software that is installed on your computer for printing data on this machine. The Canon IJ printer driver converts the print data created by your Windows application into data that your printer can understand, and sends the converted data to the printer.
XPS Printer Driver Page 443 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Overview of the Printer Driver > Canon IJ Printer Driver > XPS Printer Driver P416 XPS Printer Driver The following two printer drivers can be installed on Windows Vista SP1 or later: IJ printer driver XPS printer driver The XPS printer driver is suited to print from an application that supports XPS printing.
How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window Page 444 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Overview of the Printer Driver > Canon IJ Printer Driver > How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window P409 How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window The printer driver setup window can be displayed through the application software in use or the Start menu of the Windows.
Maintenance Tab Page 445 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Overview of the Printer Driver > Canon IJ Printer Driver > Maintenance Tab P410 Maintenance Tab The Maintenance tab allows you to perform machine maintenance or change the settings of the machine.
Canon IJ Status Monitor Page 446 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Overview of the Printer Driver > Canon IJ Status Monitor P411 Canon IJ Status Monitor If you are using the XPS printer driver, replace "Canon IJ Status Monitor" with "Canon IJ XPS Status Monitor" when reading this information. The Canon IJ Status Monitor is an application software that shows the status of the printer and the progress of printing on the Windows screen.
Canon IJ Preview Page 447 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Overview of the Printer Driver > Canon IJ Preview P412 Canon IJ Preview The Canon IJ Preview is an application software that displays what the print result will look like before a document is actually printed. The preview reflects the information that is set within the printer driver and allows you to check the document layout, print order, and number of pages.
Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Page 448 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Copying Using Useful Copy Functions Printing Photographs Easily from a Memory Card/USB Flash Drive (Photo) Using Fun Photo Printing Functions Using the Slide Show Function Printing Documents (PDF File) Printing Photo from Printed Photo or Film (Photo reprint) Using Photo Reprinting Functions Printing from Mobile Pho
Copying Page 449 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Copying Copying Making Copies Setting Items Reducing or Enlarging a Copy Displaying the Preview Screen Page top
Making Copies Page 450 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Copying > Making Copies U031 Making Copies This section describes the procedure to copy with Standard copy. For the basic procedure to make copies, refer also to Copying . 1. Make sure that the machine is turned on. 2. Select Copy on the HOME screen. The Copy standby screen is displayed. Note For details on how to select a menu on the HOME screen, refer to Overview of the Machine . 3.
Making Copies Page 451 of 1135 pages By touching the right Function button, the print settings screen is displayed. On the print settings screen, you can change the settings of page size, media type, and print quality and so on. Setting Items 5. Preview By touching the center Function button, you can preview an image of the printout on the preview screen. Displaying the Preview Screen 6. Copy menu By touching the left Function button, the Copy menu screen is displayed.
Setting Items Page 452 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Copying > Setting Items U032 Setting Items When the Copy standby screen is displayed, touch the right Function button to change the copy settings such as page size, media type, and print quality. button to change the setting item, and the Use the button to change the setting. Note Depending on the copy menu, some setting items cannot be selected.
Setting Items Page 453 of 1135 pages adjustment will be valid again. 3. Page size Select the page size of the loaded paper. 4. Type (Media type) Select the media type of the loaded paper. 5. Print qlty (Print quality) Adjust print quality according to the original. Important If you use Fast with Type set to Plain paper and the quality is not as good as expected, select Standard or High for Print qlty and try copying again. Select High for Print qlty to copy in grayscale.
Reducing or Enlarging a Copy Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Copying > Reducing or Enlarging a Copy U033 Reducing or Enlarging a Copy You can not only change the magnification optionally on the Copy standby screen but also select the preset-ratio copying or fit-to-page copying. The LCD below is displayed when you touch the right Function button in the Copy standby screen. Select the reduction/enlargement method from Magnif..
Reducing or Enlarging a Copy Page 455 of 1135 pages Note 400% MAX (maximum copy ratio) and 25% MIN (minimum copy ratio) are selectable. If you make a copy at the same size as the original, select SameMagnification.
Displaying the Preview Screen Page 456 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Copying > Displaying the Preview Screen U035 Displaying the Preview Screen Touching the center Function button in the Copy standby screen allows you to preview an image of the printout on the preview screen. Important The preview screen may not be available depending on the copy menu. The original will be scanned to display the preview image.
Using Useful Copy Functions Page 457 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Using Useful Copy Functions Using Useful Copy Functions How to Select a Useful Copy Menu Copying onto Both Sides of the Paper (Two-sided copy) Copying Two Pages to Fit onto a Single Page (2-on-1 copy) Copying Four Pages to Fit onto a Single Page (4-on-1 copy) Copying without Borders (Borderless copy) Copying Thick Originals Such as Books (Frame erase copy) Copying the Label Side of Dis
How to Select a Useful Copy Menu Page 458 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Using Useful Copy Functions > How to Select a Useful Copy Menu U036 How to Select a Useful Copy Menu This section describes the procedure to select the copy menu. 1. Make sure that the machine is turned on. 2. Load the original on the Platen Glass. Note For details on the types and conditions of originals which you can copy, refer to Loading Paper / Originals. 3.
Copying onto Both Sides of the Paper (Two-sided copy) Page 459 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Using Useful Copy Functions > Copying onto Both Sides of the Paper (Two-sided copy) U038 Copying onto Both Sides of the Paper (Two-sided copy) You can copy two original pages onto the both sides of a single sheet of paper. (A) Long-side stapling (B) Short-side stapling 1. Display the Copy menu screen. How to Select a Useful Copy Menu 2. Load paper. 3.
Copying onto Both Sides of the Paper (Two-sided copy) Page 460 of 1135 pages 7. Remove the original of front side (the first sheet) from the Platen Glass, then load the original of back side (the second sheet) on the Platen Glass. 8. Touch the OK button. The machine starts scanning the original of back side (the second sheet) and copying. Note This copy menu can be used in combination with 2-on-1 copy or 4-on-1 copy.
Copying Two Pages to Fit onto a Single Page (2-on-1 copy) Page 461 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Using Useful Copy Functions > Copying Two Pages to Fit onto a Single Page (2-on-1 copy) U040 Copying Two Pages to Fit onto a Single Page (2-on-1 copy) You can copy two original pages (A) (B) onto a single sheet of paper (C) by reducing each image. 1. Display the Copy menu screen. How to Select a Useful Copy Menu 2. Load paper. 3.
Copying Two Pages to Fit onto a Single Page (2-on-1 copy) Page 462 of 1135 pages 7. Remove the first sheet of original from the Platen Glass, then load the second sheet of original on the Platen Glass. 8. Touch the OK button. The machine starts scanning the second sheet of original and copying. Note This copy menu can be used in combination with Two-sided copy. If you use this copy menu in combination, you can copy four original pages on one sheet of paper.
Copying Four Pages to Fit onto a Single Page (4-on-1 copy) Page 463 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Using Useful Copy Functions > Copying Four Pages to Fit onto a Single Page (4-on-1 copy) U041 Copying Four Pages to Fit onto a Single Page (4-on-1 copy) You can copy four original pages onto a single sheet of paper by reducing each image. Four different layouts are available. 1. Display the Copy menu screen. How to Select a Useful Copy Menu 2.
Copying Four Pages to Fit onto a Single Page (4-on-1 copy) Page 464 of 1135 pages 7. Remove the first sheet of original from the Platen Glass, then load the second sheet of original on the Platen Glass. 8. Touch the OK button. The machine starts scanning the second sheet of original. After scanning is complete, the Document setting screen is displayed. Note If you touch the left Function button, the first sheet of original and second sheet are copied. 9.
Copying without Borders (Borderless copy) Page 465 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Using Useful Copy Functions > Copying without Borders (Borderless copy) U039 Copying without Borders (Borderless copy) You can copy images so that they fill the entire page without borders. 1. Display the Copy menu screen. How to Select a Useful Copy Menu 2. Load paper. 3. Select Borderless copy, then touch the OK button. 4.
Copying Thick Originals Such as Books (Frame erase copy) Page 466 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Using Useful Copy Functions > Copying Thick Originals Such as Books (Frame erase copy) U043 Copying Thick Originals Such as Books (Frame erase copy) When copying thick originals such as books, you can make a copy without black margins around the image and gutter shadows. Using this function, you can reduce unnecessary ink consumption. 1.
Copying the Label Side of Disc Page 467 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Using Useful Copy Functions > Copying the Label Side of Disc D003 Copying the Label Side of Disc Copy the label of an existing BD/DVD/CD and print it on a printable disc. Important You cannot print on 3.15 inches / 8 cm printable discs. Do not attach the Disc Tray until the message asking you to set the printable disc is displayed. Doing so can damage the machine.
Copying the Label Side of Disc Page 468 of 1135 pages copying. 8. Confirm the message, then set the printable disc. Use the left Function button to see how to set the printable disc. 9. Use the OK button to start copying. The machine starts copying. Note Do not see the light source directly while copying is in progress. Use the Stop button to cancel copying. After printing, allow the printing surface of the disc to dry naturally.
Printing Photographs Easily from a Memory Card/USB Flash Drive (Pho...
Printing Photographs Saved on a Memory Card/USB Flash Drive Page 470 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing Photographs Easily from a Memory Card/ USB Flash Drive (Photo) > Printing Photographs Saved on a Memory Card/USB Flash Drive U001 Printing Photographs Saved on a Memory Card/USB Flash Drive You can print the photograph saved on the memory card or USB flash drive.
Printing Photographs Saved on a Memory Card/USB Flash Drive Page 471 of 1135 pages the desired photo. How to use the Slide Show Function 5. Use the button to select the print menu or the useful function, then touch the OK button. Select the print menu or the useful function that you want to use, then follow the on-screen instructions.
Viewing and Printing Photos (Select photo print) Page 472 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing Photographs Easily from a Memory Card/ USB Flash Drive (Photo) > Viewing and Printing Photos (Select photo print) U117 Viewing and Printing Photos (Select photo print) You can view each photo from the memory card or USB flash drive on the LCD and print the desired photo. You can also specify the number of copies for each photo and add the print queue.
Viewing and Printing Photos (Select photo print) Page 473 of 1135 pages 1. Number of copies Specify by using the + or - button. 2. Selection photo Select the photo you want to print by using the button. 3. Print settings By touching the right Function button, the print settings confirmation screen is displayed. On the print settings confirmation screen, you can change the settings of page size, media type, and print quality and so on. Setting Items 4.
Viewing and Printing Photos (Select photo print) Page 474 of 1135 pages Note This queue print function can be used in Select photo print (Photo). 1. Touch the right Function button when the print progress screen is displayed. The photo selection screen is displayed. Note While the photo selection screen is displayed, the machine starts the print queue. 2. Select the photo you want to print and specify the number of copies for each photo. Note The 3.
Printing All Photos Saved on a Memory Card/USB Flash Drive (Print all ... Page 475 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing Photographs Easily from a Memory Card/ USB Flash Drive (Photo) > Printing All Photos Saved on a Memory Card/USB Flash Drive (Print all photos) U011 Printing All Photos Saved on a Memory Card/USB Flash Drive (Print all photos) You can print all photos saved on the memory card or USB flash drive. 1. Display the Photo menu screen.
Setting Items Page 476 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing Photographs Easily from a Memory Card/ USB Flash Drive (Photo) > Setting Items U002 Setting Items You can specify the setting of page size, media type, and print quality and so on to print the photos saved on the memory card or USB flash drive. Print settings Screen (Print Settings Confirmation Screen) Specify the basic setting for printing on this screen.
Setting Items Page 477 of 1135 pages You can specify the following setting items. button to change the setting item and the Use the LCD. button to change the setting on the Note Depending on the print menu, some setting items cannot be selected. This section describes the setting items in Select photo print. The setting item cannot be selected is displayed grayed out or not displayed.
Setting Items eyes may be corrected. 7. Print date Activates/deactivates to print the shooting date on a photo. Note The shooting date is printed according to the settings of Date display format in Device user settings under Device settings under Setup. Device user settings 8. Print file no. Activates/deactivates to print the file number on a photo. Note If both of the conditions below are satisfied, and ON is selected for both Print date and Print file no., only the shooting date will be printed.
Setting Items 8. Page 479 of 1135 pages Color balance Adjust color balance. For example, you can increase red or yellow to adjust the skin tone. 9. Effect Applies special effects to the photo, such as printing in sepia tones or with a sketch illustration like effect.
Using Useful Display Functions Page 480 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing Photographs Easily from a Memory Card/ USB Flash Drive (Photo) > Using Useful Display Functions U014 Using Useful Display Functions In Select photo print of Photo or in some print menu of Fun photo print, you can change the method to display the photos saved on the memory card or USB flash drive.
Printing a Specified Area (Trimming mode) Page 481 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing Photographs Easily from a Memory Card/ USB Flash Drive (Photo) > Using Useful Display Functions > Printing a Specified Area (Trimming mode) U015 Printing a Specified Area (Trimming mode) You can edit images displayed on the LCD by cropping them. Note The trimming mode cannot be available depending on the print menu.
Printing a Specified Area (Trimming mode) Page 482 of 1135 pages To change the cropped area once it has been set, display the Trimming screen again. To cancel cropping after cropping has been set, display the Trimming screen again and touch the right Function button.
Skipping Photos by the Number of Photos or the Shooting Date (Skip ... Page 483 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing Photographs Easily from a Memory Card/ USB Flash Drive (Photo) > Using Useful Display Functions > Skipping Photos by the Number of Photos or the Shooting Date (Skip mode) U016 Skipping Photos by the Number of Photos or the Shooting Date (Skip mode) You can skip the photo on the LCD by the number of photos or the shooting date.
Skipping Photos by the Number of Photos or the Shooting Date (Skip ...
Using Fun Photo Printing Functions Page 485 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Using Fun Photo Printing Functions Using Fun Photo Printing Functions How to Select a Fun Photo Printing Menu Printing Several Photos on a Single Sheet of Paper (Layout print) Printing on Stickers (Sticker print) Printing a Photo Index (Photo index print) Printing Photos According to the DPOF Settings (DPOF print) Printing Photos with Print Shooting Information (Captured info p
How to Select a Fun Photo Printing Menu Page 486 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Using Fun Photo Printing Functions > How to Select a Fun Photo Printing Menu U004 How to Select a Fun Photo Printing Menu This section describes the procedure to select the print menu in Fun photo print. 1. Make sure that the machine is turned on. 2. Select Fun photo print on the HOME screen. The Fun photo print screen is displayed.
Printing Several Photos on a Single Sheet of Paper (Layout print) Page 487 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Using Fun Photo Printing Functions > Printing Several Photos on a Single Sheet of Paper (Layout print) U006 Printing Several Photos on a Single Sheet of Paper (Layout print) You can paste photos of your choice in the specified layout. 1. Display the Fun photo print screen. How to Select a Fun Photo Printing Menu 2.
Printing Several Photos on a Single Sheet of Paper (Layout print) Page 488 of 1135 pages 9. Touch the Color button. The machine starts printing.
Printing on Stickers (Sticker print) Page 489 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Using Fun Photo Printing Functions > Printing on Stickers (Sticker print) U007 Printing on Stickers (Sticker print) 1. Display the Fun photo print screen. How to Select a Fun Photo Printing Menu 2. Select Sticker print, then touch the OK button. 3. Load one sheet of stickers on the Rear Tray, then touch the OK button. Note You cannot use the Cassette to print on stickers.
Printing on Stickers (Sticker print) Page 490 of 1135 pages The print settings confirmation screen is displayed. 8. Touch the Color button. The machine starts printing.
Printing a Photo Index (Photo index print) Page 491 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Using Fun Photo Printing Functions > Printing a Photo Index (Photo index print) U010 Printing a Photo Index (Photo index print) You can print an index of all the photos saved on a memory card/USB flash drive. 1. Display the Fun photo print screen. How to Select a Fun Photo Printing Menu 2. Select Photo index print, then touch the OK button. 3.
Printing Photos According to the DPOF Settings (DPOF print) Page 492 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Using Fun Photo Printing Functions > Printing Photos According to the DPOF Settings (DPOF print) U008 Printing Photos According to the DPOF Settings (DPOF print) If you have specified Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) settings on your digital camera, you can print photos according to these settings. 1. Display the Fun photo print screen.
Printing Photos According to the DPOF Settings (DPOF print) Page 493 of 1135 pages image or number of copies to print.
Printing Photos with Print Shooting Information (Captured info print) Page 494 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Using Fun Photo Printing Functions > Printing Photos with Print Shooting Information (Captured info print) U009 Printing Photos with Print Shooting Information (Captured info print) You can print shooting information (Exif info) on the margin of the index of photos or selected individual photos. 1. Display the Fun photo print screen.
Printing ID Photo (ID photo size print) Page 495 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Using Fun Photo Printing Functions > Printing ID Photo (ID photo size print) U012 Printing ID Photo (ID photo size print) You can print photos on a memory card/USB flash drive in a specified size such as an ID photo. 1. Display the Fun photo print screen. How to Select a Fun Photo Printing Menu 2. Select ID photo size print, then touch the OK button. 3.
Creating a Calendar (Calendar print) Page 496 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Using Fun Photo Printing Functions > Creating a Calendar (Calendar print) U013 Creating a Calendar (Calendar print) You can create an original calendar using your favorite photos and a calendar. 1. Display the Fun photo print screen. How to Select a Fun Photo Printing Menu 2. Select Calendar print, then touch the OK button. 3. Use the 4.
Creating a Calendar (Calendar print) Page 497 of 1135 pages The print settings confirmation screen is displayed. By touching the right Function button, the selectable setting items are displayed. Setting Items Note If ON is selected for both Print date and Print file no., only the shooting date will be printed. When you print the photo with Calendar print, the shooting date and the file number cannot be printed together. If you want to print the file number, select OFF for Print date. 12.
Printing Photo on the Disc Label Page 498 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Using Fun Photo Printing Functions > Printing Photo on the Disc Label D004 Printing Photo on the Disc Label Print an image saved on a memory card or USB flash drive onto a printable disc. Important You cannot print on 3.15 inches / 8 cm printable discs. Do not attach the Disc Tray until the message asking you to set the printable disc is displayed.
Printing Photo on the Disc Label Page 499 of 1135 pages 9. Adjust the print area and crop the area as necessary. Use the following buttons to crop the area. , , , and buttons: Positions the cropping frame. + or - buttons, or Scroll Wheel: Sets the cropping frame size. 10. Use the OK button to finalize your selection of cropping area. The print settings confirmation screen is displayed. 11. Use the Color button to go to the next step. Note Do not use the Black button. 12.
Using the Slide Show Function Page 500 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Using the Slide Show Function Using the Slide Show Function How to use the Slide Show Function Page top
How to use the Slide Show Function Page 501 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Using the Slide Show Function > How to use the Slide Show Function U118 How to use the Slide Show Function You can show photos saved on the memory card or USB flash drive with the slide show. In the slide show, the photos is displayed one after another automatically. You can print photos within the slide show. 1. Make sure that the machine is turned on. 2.
How to use the Slide Show Function You can print the displayed photo by touching the Page 502 of 1135 pages Color button while the slide show pauses. Note You can change the print settings by touching the right Function button while the slide show pauses. Setting Items To resume the slide show, touch the OK button while the slide show pauses. You can resume the slide show by touching the right Function button while printing.
Printing Documents (PDF File) Page 503 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing Documents (PDF File) Printing Documents (PDF File) Printing Documents (PDF File) Saved on a Memory Card/USB Flash Drive Page top
Printing Documents (PDF File) Saved on a Memory Card/USB Flash Drive Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing Documents (PDF File) > Printing Documents (PDF File) Saved on a Memory Card/USB Flash Drive U098 Printing Documents (PDF File) Saved on a Memory Card/USB Flash Drive You can print PDF files scanned using the Operation Panel of the machine or made using MP Navigator EX (application software bundled with the machine) from a memory card or USB flash drive.
Printing Documents (PDF File) Saved on a Memory Card/USB Flash Drive Page 505 of 1135 pages For some PDF files, it may take longer to display the preview or part of the preview may be cropped. The name of the PDF files is displayed even though the PDF files cannot be printed using the Operation Panel of the machine. If one of the following conditions is applicable to the PDF files, they are not printable.
Printing Documents (PDF File) Saved on a Memory Card/USB Flash Drive Page 506 of 1135 pages Page top
Printing Photo from Printed Photo or Film (Photo reprint) Page 507 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing Photo from Printed Photo or Film (Photo reprint) Printing Photo from Printed Photo or Film (Photo reprint) Printing from Printed Photo or Film Setting Items Printing a Specified Area (Trimming) Page top
Printing from Printed Photo or Film Page 508 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing Photo from Printed Photo or Film (Photo reprint) > Printing from Printed Photo or Film U021 Printing from Printed Photo or Film You can scan a printed photo or film, and print from the scanned photo (Photo reprint). For the basic procedure for printing from a printed photo or film, refer to Photos.
Setting Items Page 509 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing Photo from Printed Photo or Film (Photo reprint) > Setting Items U022 Setting Items Before printing, you can specify the setting of page size, media type, and print quality and so on. Use the button to change the setting item and the button to change the setting on the LCD. Note Depending on the reprint menu, some setting items cannot be selected.
Setting Items 5. Page 510 of 1135 pages Photo fix Select No correction, Auto photo fix, or Manual correction. Note If No correction is selected, the photos are reprinted without correction. If Auto photo fix is selected, the photos are reprinted with suitable correction. If the print result with Auto photo fix selected is not satisfactory, select Manual correction.
Printing a Specified Area (Trimming) Page 511 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing Photo from Printed Photo or Film (Photo reprint) > Printing a Specified Area (Trimming) U029 Printing a Specified Area (Trimming) You can edit images displayed on the LCD by cropping them. Note The trimming function cannot be available depending on the reprint menu. 1.
Using Photo Reprinting Functions Page 512 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Using Photo Reprinting Functions Using Photo Reprinting Functions How to Select a Photo Reprinting Menu Reprinting Photo on Stickers (Sticker print) Reprinting All Photos (Print all photos) Reprinting Photo on the Disc Label Page top
How to Select a Photo Reprinting Menu Page 513 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Using Photo Reprinting Functions > How to Select a Photo Reprinting Menu U024 How to Select a Photo Reprinting Menu This section describes the procedure to select the reprint menu. 1. Make sure that the machine is turned on. 2. Select Photo reprint on the HOME screen. Note For details on how to select a menu on the HOME screen, refer to Overview of the Machine . 3.
Reprinting Photo on Stickers (Sticker print) Page 514 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Using Photo Reprinting Functions > Reprinting Photo on Stickers (Sticker print) U027 Reprinting Photo on Stickers (Sticker print) You can print a scanned favorite photo on Canon Photo Stickers. 1. Display the Reprint from printed photo screen or the Reprint from film screen. How to Select a Photo Reprinting Menu 2. Select Sticker print, then touch the OK button. 3.
Reprinting All Photos (Print all photos) Page 515 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Using Photo Reprinting Functions > Reprinting All Photos (Print all photos) U028 Reprinting All Photos (Print all photos) You can print all scanned photos. 1. Display the Reprint from printed photo screen or the Reprint from film screen. How to Select a Photo Reprinting Menu 2. Select Print all photos, then touch the OK button.
Reprinting Photo on the Disc Label Page 516 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Using Photo Reprinting Functions > Reprinting Photo on the Disc Label D005 Reprinting Photo on the Disc Label Print an image on a printed photo onto a printable disc. For MG8100 series only, you can print the image on the film (35 mm negative/positive (strip/slide)) onto a printable disc. Important You cannot print on 3.15 inches / 8 cm printable discs.
Reprinting Photo on the Disc Label Page 517 of 1135 pages If appears on the photo, the photos may be not scanned properly. Rescan the photo by using left Function button. Other options Printing a Specified Area (Trimming) 7. Confirm the print image, then use the OK button to go to the next step. The print settings confirmation screen is displayed. Note You can also crop the print area again by using the center Function button. 8.
Printing from Mobile Phone or Printing Template (Special print) Page 518 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from Mobile Phone or Printing Template (Special print) Printing from Mobile Phone or Printing Template (Special print) Printing from Mobile Phone via Infrared Communication Printing from Mobile Phone via Bluetooth Communication Printing Template Forms Such As Lined Paper or Graph Paper Page top
Printing from Mobile Phone via Infrared Communication Page 519 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from Mobile Phone or Printing Template (Special print) > Printing from Mobile Phone via Infrared Communication U056 Printing from Mobile Phone via Infrared Communication You can print photos from your mobile phone via infrared communication. When printing through infrared communication, also refer to your mobile phone's instruction manual. 1.
Printing from Mobile Phone via Infrared Communication Page 520 of 1135 pages (A) Effective angle: 10 degrees up, left, or right from the central axis (B) Infrared Port of the machine (C) Approximately 8 inches / 20 cm (Do not block with an object.) (D) Infrared Port of the mobile phone 6. Select the photo to print and send the data to the machine using the infrared communication function of the mobile phone. Printing will start after receiving all data.
Printing from Mobile Phone via Bluetooth Communication Page 521 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from Mobile Phone or Printing Template (Special print) > Printing from Mobile Phone via Bluetooth Communication U057 Printing from Mobile Phone via Bluetooth Communication This section describes the procedure to print photos through Bluetooth communication from a mobile phone with the optional Bluetooth Unit BU-30.
Printing from Mobile Phone via Bluetooth Communication For details on how to select a menu on the HOME screen, refer to Machine . 5. Page 522 of 1135 pages Overview of the Print from mobile phone, then touch the OK button. Select Print standby screen is displayed. Note You can change the print settings by touching the right Function button. For setting items, see Mobile phone print settings .
Changing the Bluetooth Settings Page 523 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from Mobile Phone or Printing Template (Special print) > Printing from Mobile Phone via Bluetooth Communication > Changing the Bluetooth Settings U058 Changing the Bluetooth Settings As preparation for printing through Bluetooth communication, you can change the settings such as the device name and passkey from the Bluetooth settings screen.
Printing Template Forms Such As Lined Paper or Graph Paper Page 524 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from Mobile Phone or Printing Template (Special print) > Printing Template Forms Such As Lined Paper or Graph Paper U030 Printing Template Forms Such As Lined Paper or Graph Paper You can print a template form such as lined paper, graph paper, or check list, etc. on A4, B5, or Lettersized plain paper.
Printing Template Forms Such As Lined Paper or Graph Paper Page 525 of 1135 pages Handwriting paper You can print handwriting paper. Setting on the LCD: Handwriting paper Weekly schedule You can print a weekly schedule form. Setting on the LCD: Weekly schedule Monthly schedule You can print a monthly schedule form. Setting on the LCD: Monthly schedule Printing template forms Print template form following the procedure below. 1. Make sure that the machine is turned on. 2.
Printing Template Forms Such As Lined Paper or Graph Paper Page 526 of 1135 pages Depending on the form, some setting of page size cannot be specified. If it is selected, Error details is displayed on the LCD. In this case, touch the left Function button to confirm the message, then change the setting. 7. Start printing. Touch the Color button for printing following form.
Scanning Page 527 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning Scanning Scanning Images Scanning with Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Scanning with Other Application Software Canon IJ Network Scan Utility Screens Other Scanning Methods Page top
Scanning Images Page 528 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning Images Scanning Images Scanning Images Before Scanning Placing Documents Placing Film Page top
Scanning Images Page 529 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning Images > Scanning Images U046 Scanning Images You can scan images from the machine and save them to a computer, on a memory card, or a USB flash drive easily. In addition, you can scan images with detailed settings from a computer using application software. Select the scanning method according to your purpose.
Before Scanning Page 530 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning Images > Before Scanning U047 Before Scanning Before scanning images, confirm the following: Make sure that the original to be scanned meets the requirements for an original to be set on the Platen Glass. If you forward the data to the PC, refer to Placing Documents for details. If you save the data to the memory card or the USB flash drive, refer to Loading Paper / Originals for details.
Placing Documents Page 531 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning Images > Placing Documents S005 Placing Documents Learn how to place documents on the machine's Platen. Place documents correctly according to the type of document to be scanned. Otherwise, documents may not be scanned correctly. Important Do not place objects on the Document Cover. The objects may fall into the machine when the Document Cover is opened. This may damage the machine. Close the Document Cover when scanning.
Placing Documents Page 532 of 1135 pages Important Important Large documents (such as A4 size photos) that cannot be placed away from the edges/ arrow (alignment mark) of the Platen may be saved as PDF files. To save in a format other than PDF, scan by specifying the file format. The portion within 0.039 inches (1 mm) inwards from the alignment mark cannot be scanned. 0.039 inches (1 mm) Placing Multiple Documents Allow 0.
Placing Film Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning Images > Placing Film S003 Placing Film This machine supports 35 mm films (film strips and mounted slides). 35 mm Film Strip 35 mm Mounted Slides Preparation Remove the Film Guide from the FAU (Film Adapter Unit) Protective Sheet. 1. Open the Document Cover and remove the FAU Protective Sheet. 2. Turn over the FAU Protective Sheet, then slightly lift the center of the Film Guide and pull it forward to remove it.
Placing Film Page 534 of 1135 pages cannot be scanned in correct colors. Close the Document Cover gently. Film Strips Load the film strip into the frame for film strip on the Film Guide removed from the Document Cover and place it on the Platen. Mounted Slides Load mounted slides into the Film Guide (with the frame for film strip removed) after placing it on the Platen. 1. With the film mark (A) facing up, open 1.
Placing Film check that the film is loaded correctly. If the holder is not closed flat, press down across the holder to fit the protrusions into the slots. Page 535 of 1135 pages the slides from left to right. Load the slides so that the film lies flat on the Platen. 4. Make sure that the spaces between frames are aligned with the white lines on the holder. Double-check the orientation of the film. Note The Film Guide holds up to four mounted slides at one time.
Placing Film Page 536 of 1135 pages 6. Gently close the Document Cover.
Scanning with Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Page 537 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Scanning with Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Saving Scanned Data on the Memory Card/USB Flash Drive Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Forwarding Scanned Data to the Computer Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Attaching the Scanned Data Using the Operation Panel of the Machine to E-mail Setting Items on the Operation Panel o
Saving Scanned Data on the Memory Card/USB Flash Drive Using the ... Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Saving Scanned Data on the Memory Card/USB Flash Drive Using the Operation Panel of the Machine U048 Saving Scanned Data on the Memory Card/USB Flash Drive Using the Operation Panel of the Machine You can save scanned data on the memory card or USB flash drive using the Operation Panel.
Saving Scanned Data on the Memory Card/USB Flash Drive Using the ... OK button. The Scan standby screen is displayed. * The following screen is a Scan standby screen for saving the data on the memory card. 6. Use the button to select the document type for Doc.type. Document Scans the original on the Platen Glass applying the optimized settings for scanning a document. Photo Scans the original on the Platen Glass applying the optimized settings for scanning a photo. 7.
Saving Scanned Data on the Memory Card/USB Flash Drive Using the ... Folder name: (file extension: JPG): CANON_SC\IMAGE\0001 File name: Running numbers, starting from SCN_0001 Importing the Scanned Data Saved on a Memory Card to the Computer When you import the scanned data saved on a memory card to the computer, import the data after performing either of the operations below: -Turning the machine off, then turn it back on. -Removing the memory card, then reinsert it into the Card Slot.
Saving Scanned Data on the Memory Card/USB Flash Drive Using the ... Page 541 of 1135 pages supplied with the USB flash drive to check if the writing operation is complete on the USB flash drive. 2. Remove the USB flash drive. Hold the USB flash drive and remove it from the machine straightforward.
Deleting Scanned Data on Memory Card/USB Flash Drive Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Memory Card/USB Flash Drive Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Saving Scanned Data on the > Deleting Scanned Data on Memory Card/USB Flash Drive U050 Deleting Scanned Data on Memory Card/USB Flash Drive You can delete scanned data on the memory card or USB flash drive using the Operation Panel. 1. Make sure that the machine is turned on. 2.
Deleting Scanned Data on Memory Card/USB Flash Drive Page 543 of 1135 pages By touching the center Function button, you can switch the display between the list and the preview. When the format for PDF data is selected, only the first page of the PDF data is displayed on the LCD. 6. Select the file to delete, then touch the OK button. 7. Select Yes on the confirmation screen, then touch the OK button. The machine starts deleting the file.
Forwarding Scanned Data to the Computer Using the Operation Panel ... Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Using the Operation Panel of the Machine the Computer Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Page 544 of 1135 pages > Forwarding Scanned Data to U051 Forwarding Scanned Data to the Computer Using the Operation Panel of the Machine You can forward the scanned data to the computer using the Operation Panel of the machine.
Forwarding Scanned Data to the Computer Using the Operation Panel ... standby screen is displayed. If you forward the data to the network-connected computer: The Save/Forward to screen is displayed. Note If the Scan standby screen for forwarding the data to the USB-connected computer is displayed on the LCD, touch the left Function button to display the Save/Forward to screen. Select the computer to forward the scanned data following the procedure below. 1. Select PC, then touch the OK button. 2.
Forwarding Scanned Data to the Computer Using the Operation Panel ... Page 546 of 1135 pages 4. Touch the right Function button to adjust the settings as necessary. Setting Items on the Operation Panel of the Machine 5. Load the original on the Platen Glass. Note Refer to Placing Documents for how to load the original on the Platen Glass. You can confirm the procedure to load the original by touching the center Function button. 6.
Attaching the Scanned Data Using the Operation Panel of the Machine... Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Page 547 of 1135 pages > Attaching the Scanned Data Using the Operation Panel of the Machine to E-mail U101 Attaching the Scanned Data Using the Operation Panel of the Machine to E-mail You can attach scanned data to an e-mail using the Operation Panel of the machine.
Attaching the Scanned Data Using the Operation Panel of the Machine... 4. Use the Page 548 of 1135 pages button to select the computer to forward the scanned data, then touch the OK button. Select Local (USB) for a USB-connected computer, or select the computer to forward the scanned data for a network-connected computer. The Scan standby screen is displayed. 5. Use the button to select the document type for Doc.type.
Attaching the Scanned Data Using the Operation Panel of the Machine... Page 549 of 1135 pages Color or Black button for the first The program selection screen may be displayed after touching the time. In this case, specify MP Navigator EX Ver4.0 as the application software to use, select Always use this program for this action, then click OK. From the next time, MP Navigator EX is automatically started.
Setting Items on the Operation Panel of the Machine Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Page 550 of 1135 pages > Setting Items on the Operation Panel of the Machine U049 Setting Items on the Operation Panel of the Machine You can change the scan settings such as the scan size, resolution, or data format. When the Scan standby screen is displayed, touch the right Function button to select the setting item. OK button.
Setting Items on the Operation Panel of the Machine Page 551 of 1135 pages 5. Reduce show-thru*1*2 (Reducing show-through) Characters on the back may show through when scanning a thin document such as a newspaper. Select ON if characters seem to show through on the scanned document. 6. Descreen*1*2 A printout consists of minute dots to make characters or graphs. Interfering with each dot may result in uneven shades or a striped pattern.
Appendix: Various Scan Settings Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Settings Page 552 of 1135 pages > Appendix: Various Scan S010 Appendix: Various Scan Settings Enabling network scanning Network Scan Settings Specifying how to respond when scanning using the Operation Panel of the machine Selecting a Response to Commands from the Operation Panel Using MP Navigator EX Page top
Network Scan Settings Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Settings > Network Scan Settings Page 553 of 1135 pages > Appendix: Various Scan S006 Network Scan Settings You can connect the machine to a network to share it among multiple computers or scan images into a specified computer. Important Multiple users cannot scan at the same time. Note Complete the network settings of the machine beforehand. (Refer to the printed manual: Started .
Network Scan Settings Note For USB connection, select (model name) series for Product Name. 4. Click OK. The Preferences dialog box closes. You can now scan via a network connection. Go to the Main Menu to check whether network scanning is enabled. Setting for Scanning Using the Operation Panel You can make settings for scanning using the Operation Panel of the machine. 1. Check that Canon IJ Network Scan Utility is running.
Network Scan Settings Page 555 of 1135 pages The Canon IJ Network Scan Utility dialog box opens. 3. Select Canon (model name) ser_XXXXXXXXXXXX and click OK. (Where XXXXXXXXXXXX is the MAC address.) Note When multiple scanners are connected via a network, you can select up to three scanners. See " Canon IJ Network Scan Utility Menu and Setting Screen " for details on Canon IJ Network Scan Utility.
Selecting a Response to Commands from the Operation Panel Using M... Page 556 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Appendix: Various Scan Settings > Selecting a Response to Commands from the Operation Panel Using MP Navigator EX S007 Selecting a Response to Commands from the Operation Panel Using MP Navigator EX MP Navigator EX enables you to specify how to respond when scanning using the Operation Panel of the machine. 1.
Selecting a Response to Commands from the Operation Panel Using M... Page 557 of 1135 pages Note See the section below for details. Scanner Button Settings Tab (Save to PC) Scanner Button Settings Tab (Attach to E-mail) 4. Click OK. The operation will be performed according to the settings when you start scanning using the Operation Panel of the machine.
Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Page 558 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Scanning with the Bundled Application Software What Is MP Navigator EX (Supplied Scanner Software)? Let's Try Scanning Useful MP Navigator EX Functions Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX MP Navigator EX Screens Appendix: Opening Files Other than Scanned Images Page top
What Is MP Navigator EX (Supplied Scanner Software)? Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Scanner Software)? Page 559 of 1135 pages > What Is MP Navigator EX (Supplied S101 What Is MP Navigator EX (Supplied Scanner Software)? MP Navigator EX is an application that enables you to easily scan photos, documents and film. It is suitable even for beginners. Important MP Navigator EX may not start from the Operation Panel of the machine.
What Is MP Navigator EX (Supplied Scanner Software)? Page 560 of 1135 pages Scan/Import Window Use the Scan/Import window to scan photos, documents and film, or import images saved on memory cards. View & Use Window Use the View & Use window to select what you want to do with the scanned images. Note See "File Formats " for data formats (extensions) supported by MP Navigator EX.
Let's Try Scanning Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Page 561 of 1135 pages > Let's Try Scanning S100 Let's Try Scanning Try scanning using MP Navigator EX. Starting MP Navigator EX Starting MP Navigator EX Scanning with a simple operation Easy Scanning with Auto Scan Scanning documents, photos, magazines, etc.
Starting MP Navigator EX Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Page 562 of 1135 pages > Let's Try Scanning > Starting MP Navigator EX S111 Starting MP Navigator EX Note To scan via a network connection, start MP Navigator EX and set up the network environment. Network Scan Settings Starting MP Navigator EX 1. From the Start menu, select All Programs > Canon Utilities > MP Navigator EX 4.0 > MP Navigator EX 4.0. MP Navigator EX starts. Starting One-click Mode 1.
Starting MP Navigator EX Page 563 of 1135 pages The One-click Mode screen appears. Note Select the Show this window at startup checkbox in the Navigation Mode screen to always open the Navigation Mode screen at startup. If this checkbox is not selected, the last used screen appears at startup.
Easy Scanning with Auto Scan Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Page 564 of 1135 pages > Let's Try Scanning > Easy Scanning with Auto Scan S108 Easy Scanning with Auto Scan Scan documents easily by automatically detecting the document type. Important Supported document types are photos, postcards, business cards, magazines, newspapers, text documents, BD/DVD/CD and film. To scan other documents, specify the document type.
Easy Scanning with Auto Scan Page 565 of 1135 pages A message about placing documents appears. Click Open Manual to open this guide (if it is installed). Click OK to start scanning. Note Click Cancel to cancel the scan. When scanning is completed, the Scan Complete dialog box opens. Select Scan or Exit. Select Scan to scan the next document, or select Exit to end. The scanned images appear in the Thumbnail window. 6. Edit the scanned images as required.
Easy Scanning with Auto Scan Page 566 of 1135 pages 7. Save the scanned images.
Scanning Photos and Documents Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software and Documents Page 567 of 1135 pages > Let's Try Scanning > Scanning Photos S102 Scanning Photos and Documents Scan photos and documents placed on the Platen. 1. Place the document on the Platen. Placing Documents 2. Start MP Navigator EX and open the Navigation Mode screen. Starting MP Navigator EX 3. In Scan/Import, click Photos/Documents (Platen). 4.
Scanning Photos and Documents Note When you select Magazine(Color), the descreen function will be enabled and scanning takes longer than usual. To disable the descreen function, deselect the Descreen checkbox in the Scan Settings dialog box. Select Text(OCR) to extract the text in the image and convert to editable text data using MP Navigator EX. This setting is not available when the Compress scanned images when transferring checkbox is selected on the " General Tab " of the Preferences dialog box.
Scanning Photos and Documents Page 569 of 1135 pages 7. Edit the scanned images as required. Use Edit Tools to rotate images, select a part of an image, etc. See the Edit Tools in " Photos/Documents (Platen) Screen (Scan/Import Window) " for details. Note First select images to edit. (Selected images are outlined in orange.) Drag the mouse or use Shift + arrow keys to select multiple images. You can also select images by dragging and dropping them into the Selected Images area. 8.
Scanning Film Page 570 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Let's Try Scanning > Scanning Film S103 Scanning Film This machine supports 35 mm negative and positive film strips (standard state of developed film, with six frames in each strip) as well as 35 mm mounted positive slides (one frame per mounted slide). Up to six film strip frames or four mounted slide frames can be scanned continuously.
Scanning Film Film may not be scanned correctly when Film Type in the Scan Settings dialog box is set to Auto. In that case, select the type of film in Film Type and scan again. Note To scan black and white film, it is recommended that you select Black and White Negative Film or Black and White Positive Film for Film Type in the Scan Settings dialog box. 5. Click Scan. Preview scan starts. When preview scan of the film is completed, the preview images appear.
Scanning Film Page 572 of 1135 pages Note Click Cancel to cancel the scan. When scanning is completed, the Scan Complete dialog box opens. Select Scan or Exit. Select Scan to scan the next film, or select Exit to end. The scanned images appear in the Thumbnail window. 7. Edit the scanned images as required. Use Edit Tools to rotate images, select a part of an image, etc. See the Edit Tools in " Film Screen (Scan/Import Window) " for details. Note First select images to edit.
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Multiple Documents at One Time Page 573 of 1135 pages > Let's Try Scanning > Scanning S105 Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time You can scan two or more photos (small documents) at one time by setting Document Size to Auto Detect (Multiple Documents) in the Scan Settings dialog box of MP Navigator EX. Important The following types of documents may not be cropped correctly.
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time 5. Click Specify.... Select Auto Detect (Multiple Documents) for Document Size. When setting is completed, click OK. Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents) 6. Click Scan.
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time Multiple documents are scanned at one time. Note Click Cancel to cancel the scan. When scanning is completed, the Scan Complete dialog box opens. Select Scan or Exit. Select Scan to scan the next document, or select Exit to end. The scanned images appear in the Thumbnail window. 7. Edit the scanned images as required. Use Edit Tools to rotate images, select a part of an image, etc.
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time Page 576 of 1135 pages Saving as PDF Files Note If you want to preview the images before scanning, use ScanGear.
Scanning Images Larger than the Platen (Stitch Assist) Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Larger than the Platen (Stitch Assist) Page 577 of 1135 pages > Let's Try Scanning > Scanning Images S106 Scanning Images Larger than the Platen (Stitch Assist) Stitch Assist allows you to scan the left and right halves of a large document separately and combine the scanned images back into one image. You can scan documents that are up to twice as large as the Platen. 1.
Scanning Images Larger than the Platen (Stitch Assist) 4. Click Specify.... Select Stitch Assist for Document Size, then specify the scanning resolution as required. When setting is completed, click OK. Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents) 5. Click Scan.
Scanning Images Larger than the Platen (Stitch Assist) The Stitch-assist window opens. 6. Place the left half of the document face-down on the Platen. 7. Click Scan. The left half of the document is scanned and appears in the Stitch-assist window. Note Click Cancel to cancel the scan.
Scanning Images Larger than the Platen (Stitch Assist) 8. Place the right half of the document face-down on the Platen. 9. Click Scan. The right half of the document is scanned. Note Click Cancel to cancel the scan. 10. Adjust the scanned image as required. Use the icons to swap the left and right halves, rotate the image 180 degrees or enlarge/reduce the image. (Swap Left & Right) Swaps the left and right halves. Important This function is not available while the image is enlarged/reduced.
Scanning Images Larger than the Platen (Stitch Assist) Important This function is not available while the image is enlarged/reduced. (Enlarge) Enlarges the displayed image. (Reduce) Reduces the displayed image. (Full-screen) Displays the entire image. Note Enlarge/Reduce does not affect the actual size of the scanned image. When the document is scanned upside down, the image displayed in the Stitch-assist window will also be upside down. Click Rotate 180° to rotate the image to the correct orientation.
Scanning Images Larger than the Platen (Stitch Assist) Page 582 of 1135 pages 13. Save the scanned images.
Easy Scanning with One-click Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software with One-click Page 583 of 1135 pages > Let's Try Scanning > Easy Scanning S104 Easy Scanning with One-click You can complete "from scanning to saving", etc. at one time by simply clicking the corresponding icon. 1. Place the document on the Platen. Placing Documents 2. Start MP Navigator EX. Starting MP Navigator EX The MP Navigator EX Navigation Mode screen or One-click Mode screen appears.
Easy Scanning with One-click Page 584 of 1135 pages 4. Click the corresponding icon. Custom Scan with One-click Tab One-click Mode Screen 5. Select Document Type according to the document to be scanned. 6. Set the document size and scanning resolution as required. 7. Start scanning. Starts scanning. Note Click Cancel to cancel the scan.
Useful MP Navigator EX Functions Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Page 585 of 1135 pages > Useful MP Navigator EX Functions S400 Useful MP Navigator EX Functions With MP Navigator EX, you can correct/enhance scanned images beautifully, and search saved images quickly.
Correcting/Enhancing Images Automatically Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Correcting/Enhancing Images Automatically Page 586 of 1135 pages > Useful MP Navigator EX Functions > S401 Correcting/Enhancing Images Automatically MP Navigator EX will analyze and correct/enhance scanned images automatically. 1.
Correcting/Enhancing Images Automatically Note If you selected only one image in the View & Use window, the thumbnail list does not appear and only the preview image appears. 4. Make sure that Auto is selected. 5. Click Auto Photo Fix, Face Sharpener or Digital Face Smoothing. Important Once image is corrected with Auto Photo Fix and saved, it cannot be corrected again with Auto Photo Fix. Auto Photo Fix may not be available for images edited using an application, digital camera, etc.
Correcting/Enhancing Images Automatically Page 588 of 1135 pages 6. Click OK. The entire image is corrected/enhanced automatically and the upper left of the thumbnail and preview image. (Correct/Enhance) mark appears on Note Click Reset Selected Image to undo the correction/enhancement. Select the Apply to all images checkbox to correct/enhance all selected images. 7. Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images. You can save corrected/enhanced images as new files.
Correcting/Enhancing Images Manually Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Page 589 of 1135 pages > Useful MP Navigator EX Functions > Correcting/Enhancing Images Manually S402 Correcting/Enhancing Images Manually You can correct/enhance scanned images manually. 1. Scan documents into MP Navigator EX and save them, then open the View & Use window from the Navigation Mode screen and select the photos you want to correct/ enhance.
Correcting/Enhancing Images Manually Page 590 of 1135 pages Note If you selected only one image in the View & Use window, the thumbnail list does not appear and only the preview image appears. 4. Select Manual, then click Correct/Enhance. 5. Click Face Brightener, Face Sharpener, Digital Face Smoothing or Blemish Remover. Note The Face Brightener, Face Sharpener and Digital Face Smoothing effect levels can be changed using the slider that appears by clicking the corresponding buttons.
Correcting/Enhancing Images Manually The portion in and around the selected area is corrected/enhanced and appears on the upper left of the thumbnail and preview image. Page 591 of 1135 pages (Correct/Enhance) mark Note You can also drag to rotate the rectangle. Click Undo to undo the latest correction/enhancement. Click Reset Selected Image to cancel all corrections, enhancements and adjustments applied to the selected image. 7. Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images.
Adjusting Images Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Adjusting Images Page 592 of 1135 pages > Useful MP Navigator EX Functions > S406 Adjusting Images You can make fine adjustments to the overall brightness, contrast, etc. of images. 1. Scan documents into MP Navigator EX and save them, then open the View & Use window from the Navigation Mode screen and select the photos you want to adjust. Note See " Let's Try Scanning" to scan images into MP Navigator EX.
Adjusting Images Page 593 of 1135 pages Note If you selected only one image in the View & Use window, the thumbnail list does not appear and only the preview image appears. 4. Select Manual, then click Adjust. 5. Move the slider of the item you want to adjust and set the effect level. When you move a slider, preview image. (Correct/Enhance) mark appears on the upper left of the thumbnail and Note Click Advanced to make fine adjustments to the image brightness and color tone.
Adjusting Images Page 594 of 1135 pages To save only the images you like, select them and click Save Selected Image. To save all images, click Save All Corrected Images. The file format of adjusted images is JPEG/Exif. 7. Click Exit. Important The adjustments will be lost if you exit before saving adjusted images.
Searching Images Page 595 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Searching Images > Useful MP Navigator EX Functions > S407 Searching Images In the View & Use window of the Navigation Mode screen, you can search images saved on your computer and open them in MP Navigator EX. Opened images can be printed and edited. Note Search images in My Box (Scanned/Imported Images), Recently Saved Images or a selected folder and its subfolders.
Searching Images Search in If you know where to look for, select the drive, folder or network from Specify Folder. File Name If you know the file name, enter it. A word or phrase in the file Enter a word or phrase included in the items selected in More Advanced Options. Important For PDF files, you can only search for those created with MP Navigator EX. You cannot search PDF files created or edited in other applications. Also, searching PDF files is available only when keyword search is set.
Searching Images Page 597 of 1135 pages checkbox, text in Maker, Model, Description and User Comment is searched. If you select the PDF text checkbox, text in PDF files is searched. Important Text in password-protected PDF files cannot be searched. Search subfolders Select this checkbox to search subfolders. Case sensitive Select this checkbox to match case. Match all criteria Searches for files that meet all the specified criteria.
Classifying Images into Categories Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Classifying Images into Categories Page 598 of 1135 pages > Useful MP Navigator EX Functions > S403 Classifying Images into Categories Display images scanned with MP Navigator EX by category. You can classify images displayed in Unclassified automatically, and also create custom categories. You can drag and drop an image to move it from one category to another.
Classifying Images into Categories Photos: Portrait, Others Documents: Business Card, Postcard, Standard Size, PDF File, Others Custom categories: Displays your custom categories. To create custom categories, see " Creating Custom Categories ." Unclassified: Displays images that are not classified. Note Click Classify Images to classify images displayed in Unclassified automatically. Click Cancel to stop. Classification may take time if there are many images to classify.
Classifying Images into Categories Page 600 of 1135 pages Related Topic View & Use Window Page top
Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Page 601 of 1135 pages > Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX S500 Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX You can scan images using MP Navigator EX and edit or print the saved images. See the corresponding sections below for details on saving scanned images.
Saving Page 602 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Saving > Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX > S112 Saving Save images scanned with MP Navigator EX to a computer. 1. Select the checkboxes of the images you want to save, then click Save. 2. In the Save dialog box, specify the save settings. Specify the destination folder, file name and file type. Save Dialog Box Important You cannot select JPEG/Exif when Document Type is Text(OCR).
Saving Page 603 of 1135 pages Windows 7: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder 3. Click Save. Scanned images are saved according to the settings. To further use/edit the scanned images on MP Navigator EX, click Open saved location in the Save Complete dialog box.
Saving as PDF Files Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Page 604 of 1135 pages > Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX > Saving as PDF Files S113 Saving as PDF Files Save images scanned with MP Navigator EX as PDF files. 1. Select the checkboxes of the images you want to save, then click Save as PDF file. 2. In the Save as PDF file dialog box, specify the save settings. Specify the file type, file name and destination folder.
Saving as PDF Files Page 605 of 1135 pages Note By default, the scanned images are saved in the following folders. Windows 7: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder You can set passwords for PDF files. Setting Passwords for PDF Files 3. Click Save. Scanned images are saved according to the settings.
Creating/Editing PDF Files Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Page 606 of 1135 pages > Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX > Creating/Editing PDF Files S501 Creating/Editing PDF Files Create/edit PDF files using MP Navigator EX. After scanning documents and saving them, open the View & Use window to create PDF files and add/delete pages, rearrange the page order, etc. Important You can create or edit up to 99 pages at one time using MP Navigator EX.
Creating/Editing PDF Files Page 607 of 1135 pages Note If a password-protected PDF file is selected, you will be prompted to enter the password. Opening/Editing Password-protected PDF Files 3. Add/delete pages as required. To add an existing file, click Add Page and select the file. To delete a page, select it and click Delete Selected Pages. Note You can add PDF, JPEG, TIFF and BMP files. When adding a password-protected PDF file, you will be prompted to enter the password. 4.
Creating/Editing PDF Files Page 608 of 1135 pages For PDF files, you can only select those created with MP Navigator EX. You cannot select PDF files created with other applications. PDF files edited in other applications cannot be selected as well. 2. Click Open PDF file on the list. The application associated with the file extension (.pdf) by the operating system starts. Important Password-protected PDF files cannot be opened in applications not supporting PDF security.
Printing Documents Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Page 609 of 1135 pages > Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX > Printing Documents S502 Printing Documents You can print multiple scanned images at one time, print at specific quality, etc. using MP Navigator EX. 1. Scan documents into MP Navigator EX and save them, then open the View & Use window from the Navigation Mode screen and select images.
Printing Documents Page 610 of 1135 pages Important At normal-size (100%), some images may be printed small or with some portions cropped. In that case, select Auto to resize the print in proportion to the paper size. 4. Click Print. Starts printing. Note When printing a multiple-page PDF file via Print Document, printing may take time depending on your computer. In that case, follow these steps and change settings. Windows 7: 1. From the Start menu, select Devices and Printers. 2.
Printing Photos Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Page 611 of 1135 pages > Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX > Printing Photos S503 Printing Photos You can print photos using MP Navigator EX or an application that accompanies the machine. After scanning documents and saving them, open the View & Use window to select how you want to print the photos. Note See " Let's Try Scanning" to scan images into MP Navigator EX.
Printing Photos Page 612 of 1135 pages 2. Click Print Photo on the list. 3. Specify print settings as required. In the displayed dialog box, specify paper size, print count, etc. Print Photo Dialog Box 4. Click Print. Starts printing. Note To cancel while spooling, click Cancel. To cancel while printing, click Cancel Printing in the confirmation window for the printer status. To open a confirmation window for the printer status, click printer icon on the taskbar.
Sending via E-mail Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Page 613 of 1135 pages > Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX > Sending via E-mail S504 Sending via E-mail Send scanned images via e-mail. Important MP Navigator EX is compatible with the following e-mail software programs: - Microsoft Outlook - Windows Mail (Windows Vista) - Outlook Express (Windows XP) (If an e-mail software program does not operate properly, check that the program's MAPI is enabled.
Sending via E-mail Page 614 of 1135 pages 3. Set the e-mail software program and file save options as required. Specify the e-mail software program, destination folder and file name. Send via E-mail Dialog Box Note You can select a compression type when sending JPEG images via e-mail. Click Set... to open a dialog box and select a compression type from High(Low Compression), Standard or Low(High Compression). 4. Click OK.
Editing Files Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Page 615 of 1135 pages > Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX > Editing Files S505 Editing Files You can edit images or convert them to text using MP Navigator EX or an application that accompanies the machine. After scanning documents and saving them, open the View & Use window to select what you want to do with the images. Note See " Let's Try Scanning" to scan images into MP Navigator EX.
Editing Files Page 616 of 1135 pages Converting Documents to Text Scan text in scanned magazines and newspapers and display it in Notepad (included with Windows). Important PDF files cannot be converted to text. 1. Select images and click Edit/Convert. 2. Click Convert to text file on the list. Notepad (included with Windows) starts and editable text appears. Note Only text written in languages that can be selected on the General tab can be extracted to Notepad (included with Windows). Click Set...
Setting Passwords for PDF Files Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Setting Passwords for PDF Files Page 617 of 1135 pages > Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX > S508 Setting Passwords for PDF Files Set passwords for opening, editing and printing PDF files. You can set two passwords: one for opening the file and one for editing/printing it.
Setting Passwords for PDF Files Page 618 of 1135 pages The Password Security -Settings dialog box opens. Setting Passwords for Existing Files 1. In the View & Use window, select image/PDF files and click PDF. 2. Click Create/Edit PDF file on the list. Creating/Editing PDF Files 3. Edit files in the Create/Edit PDF file window, then click Save Selected Pages or Save All Pages. The Save as PDF file dialog box opens. 4. Select the Password security settings checkbox.
Setting Passwords for PDF Files Important Up to 32 single-byte alphanumeric characters can be used for the password. Passwords are case sensitive. Select both checkboxes to set both Document Open Password and Permissions Password. You cannot use the same password for both. 3. Click OK. The Confirm Document Open Password or Confirm Permissions Password dialog box opens. Document Open Password Permissions Password 4. Re-enter the password and click OK. The Save as PDF file dialog box returns.
Setting Passwords for PDF Files Page 620 of 1135 pages Related Topic Opening/Editing Password-protected PDF Files Page top
Opening/Editing Password-protected PDF Files Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Opening/Editing Password-protected PDF Files Page 621 of 1135 pages > Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX > S509 Opening/Editing Password-protected PDF Files Enter a password to open or edit/print password-protected PDF files. Password entry method varies by operation. The following procedures are examples only.
Opening/Editing Password-protected PDF Files 2. The Password dialog box opens. Enter the password and click OK. The PDF file opens in the Zoom in dialog box. Note To reopen the file after closing the Zoom in dialog box, re-enter the password. Entering a Password (Permissions Password) to Edit or Print a File 1. In the View & Use window, select PDF files and click PDF or Print.
Opening/Editing Password-protected PDF Files Page 623 of 1135 pages 2. To create a PDF file or edit the file, select Create/Edit PDF file on the list. To print the file, click Print Document. In the Password dialog box, you will be prompted to enter a password. Note If the Document Open Password is set as well, the Document Open Password will be required, then the Permissions Password will be required. 3. Enter the password and click OK. The corresponding dialog box opens.
MP Navigator EX Screens Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Page 624 of 1135 pages > MP Navigator EX Screens S700 MP Navigator EX Screens Learn about the screens and functions of MP Navigator EX.
Navigation Mode Screen Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Navigation Mode Screen Page 625 of 1135 pages > MP Navigator EX Screens > S735 Navigation Mode Screen This is one of the startup screens of MP Navigator EX. Select an icon at the top of the screen to display the corresponding tab. Use each tab depending on what you want to do. Scan/Import You can scan photos, documents and film, or import images saved on memory cards.
Navigation Mode Screen Page 626 of 1135 pages Page top
Scan/Import Documents or Images Tab Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Import Documents or Images Tab Page 627 of 1135 pages > MP Navigator EX Screens > Scan/ S702 Scan/Import Documents or Images Tab Select Scan/Import in the Navigation Mode screen to display the Scan/Import Documents or Images tab. You can scan photos, documents and film, or import images saved on memory cards. Auto Scan Opens the Scan/Import window with Auto Scan selected.
Scan/Import Documents or Images Tab Page 628 of 1135 pages (Guide) Opens this guide.
View Use Images on your Computer Tab Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Use Images on your Computer Tab Page 629 of 1135 pages > MP Navigator EX Screens > View & S703 View & Use Images on your Computer Tab Select View & Use in the Navigation Mode screen to display the View & Use Images on your Computer tab. You can open images saved on a computer and print them or attach them to e-mail. You can also edit them using an application that accompanies the machine.
View Use Images on your Computer Tab Page 630 of 1135 pages Preferences The Preferences dialog box opens. In the Preferences dialog box, you can make advanced settings to MP Navigator EX functions. Preferences Dialog Box (Guide) Opens this guide.
Custom Scan with One-click Tab Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Scan with One-click Tab Page 631 of 1135 pages > MP Navigator EX Screens > Custom S704 Custom Scan with One-click Tab Select One-click in the Navigation Mode screen to display the Custom Scan with One-click tab. You can complete "from scanning to saving", etc. at one time by simply clicking the corresponding icon. Auto Scan Scan documents by automatically detecting the document type.
Custom Scan with One-click Tab Page 632 of 1135 pages Custom Scan documents/photos and open them in a specified application. The document type can be automatically detected. When you click this icon, the Custom dialog box opens and you can specify the scan/save and application settings. Custom Dialog Box Start scanning by clicking the button Select this checkbox and click an icon to start scanning immediately. (Switch Mode) Switches to One-click Mode. The One-click Mode screen appears.
Auto Scan Screen (Scan/Import Window) Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Scan Screen (Scan/Import Window) Page 633 of 1135 pages > MP Navigator EX Screens > Auto S744 Auto Scan Screen (Scan/Import Window) Select Scan/Import in the Navigation Mode screen and click Auto Scan or click Auto Scan in the Scan/ Import window to open the Auto Scan screen (Scan/Import window). Open this window when you want to scan documents by automatically detecting the document type.
Auto Scan Screen (Scan/Import Window) Settings and Operation Buttons (View & Use) Click this when you want to open images and PDF files saved on your computer. The View & Use window opens. View & Use Window Auto Scan Displays the screen for scanning documents by automatically detecting the document type, etc. Photos/Documents (Platen) Click this when you want to scan photos, documents, magazines and other printed materials. The screen for scanning photos and documents appears.
Auto Scan Screen (Scan/Import Window) (Guide) Opens this guide. Edit Tools (Select All) Selects all images in the Thumbnail window. (Cancel All) Cancels all image selections in the Thumbnail window. (Rotate Left) Rotates the target image (outlined in orange) 90 degrees counter-clockwise. (Rotate Right) Rotates the target image (outlined in orange) 90 degrees clockwise. (Invert) Inverts the target image (outlined in orange) horizontally. (Trimming) Trims the target image (outlined in orange).
Auto Scan Screen (Scan/Import Window) Page 636 of 1135 pages Selected Images Area (Cancel All) Cancels the selection of all images in the Selected Images area. (Cancel Selection) Cancels the selection of the target image (outlined in orange) in the Selected Images area. Selected Images Area Images selected in the Thumbnail window are displayed.
Scan Settings Dialog Box (Auto Scan) Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Settings Dialog Box (Auto Scan) Page 637 of 1135 pages > MP Navigator EX Screens > Scan S745 Scan Settings Dialog Box (Auto Scan) The Scan Settings dialog box opens when you click Specify... in the Scan/Import window. Document Type Auto Mode is set. Important To scan black and white film, scan from the Film screen of Scan/Import window.
Photos/Documents (Platen) Screen (Scan/Import Window) Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Documents (Platen) Screen (Scan/Import Window) > MP Navigator EX Screens > Photos/ S708 Photos/Documents (Platen) Screen (Scan/Import Window) Select Scan/Import in the Navigation Mode screen and click Photos/Documents (Platen) or click Photos/ Documents (Platen) in the Scan/Import window to open the Photos/Documents (Platen) screen (Scan/ Import window).
Photos/Documents (Platen) Screen (Scan/Import Window) Click this when you want to import images saved on a memory card. The screen for importing images from a memory card appears. Memory Card Screen (Scan/Import Window) Document Type Select the type of document to be scanned.
Photos/Documents (Platen) Screen (Scan/Import Window) The Preferences dialog box opens. In the Preferences dialog box, you can make advanced settings to MP Navigator EX functions. Preferences Dialog Box (Guide) Opens this guide. Edit Tools (Select All) Selects all images in the Thumbnail window. (Cancel All) Cancels all image selections in the Thumbnail window. (Rotate Left) Rotates the target image (outlined in orange) 90 degrees counter-clockwise.
Photos/Documents (Platen) Screen (Scan/Import Window) Page 641 of 1135 pages When you click Close All, the button changes to Open All. Selected Images Area (Cancel All) Cancels the selection of all images in the Selected Images area. (Cancel Selection) Cancels the selection of the target image (outlined in orange) in the Selected Images area. Selected Images Area Images selected in the Thumbnail window are displayed.
Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents) Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents) Page 642 of 1135 pages > MP Navigator EX Screens > Scan S713 Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents) The Scan Settings dialog box opens when you click Specify... in the Scan/Import window. In the Scan Settings dialog box, you can make advanced scan settings. Document Type Select the type of document to be scanned.
Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents) Resolution Note The following scanning resolutions can be specified when Document Type is Text(OCR). 300 dpi / 400 dpi Auto Photo Fix / Auto Document Fix The displayed item varies by Document Type. Auto Photo Fix This is displayed when Document Type is Color Photo. Select this checkbox to automatically analyze the captured scene (landscape, night scene, etc.) and apply suitable corrections.
Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents) See "Gutter Shadow Correction " for details. Reduce Show-through Select this checkbox to sharpen text in a document or reduce show-through in newspapers. Important You cannot select this checkbox when Document Type is Color Photo, Black and White Photo or Text(OCR). Note Select this checkbox when Document Type is text document and show-through is apparent in the scanned image.
Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents) Page 645 of 1135 pages You cannot select this checkbox when Document Type is Color Photo or Black and White Photo. You cannot select this checkbox when Document Size is Stitch Assist. Defaults Restore the default settings.
Film Screen (Scan/Import Window) Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Screen (Scan/Import Window) Page 646 of 1135 pages > MP Navigator EX Screens > Film S709 Film Screen (Scan/Import Window) Select Scan/Import in the Navigation Mode screen and click Film or click Film in the Scan/Import window to open the Film screen (Scan/Import window). Open this window when you want to scan film from the Platen.
Film Screen (Scan/Import Window) Click this when you want to import images saved on a memory card. The screen for importing images from a memory card appears. Memory Card Screen (Scan/Import Window) Specify... Specify the film type, resolution, and other advanced scan settings. Scan Settings Dialog Box (Film) Important Specify... is not available if the Use the scanner driver checkbox is selected. Use the scanner driver Select this checkbox when you want to scan with ScanGear (scanner driver).
Film Screen (Scan/Import Window) Selects all images in the Thumbnail window. (Cancel All) Cancels all image selections in the Thumbnail window. (Rotate Left) Rotates the target image (outlined in orange) 90 degrees counter-clockwise. (Rotate Right) Rotates the target image (outlined in orange) 90 degrees clockwise. (Invert) Inverts the target image (outlined in orange) horizontally. (Trimming) Trims the target image (outlined in orange).
Film Screen (Scan/Import Window) Page 649 of 1135 pages (Cancel Selection) Cancels the selection of the target image (outlined in orange) in the Selected Images area. Selected Images Area Images selected in the Thumbnail window are displayed.
Scan Settings Dialog Box (Film) Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Settings Dialog Box (Film) Page 650 of 1135 pages > MP Navigator EX Screens > Scan S714 Scan Settings Dialog Box (Film) The Scan Settings dialog box opens when you click Specify... in the Scan/Import window. In the Scan Settings dialog box, you can make advanced scan settings. Film Type Select the type of film to be scanned. Important Film may not be scanned correctly when Auto is selected.
Scan Settings Dialog Box (Film) Page 651 of 1135 pages Navigator EX screen, or click Scan to start scanning the selected frames. Defaults Restore the default settings.
Save Dialog Box Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Dialog Box Page 652 of 1135 pages > MP Navigator EX Screens > Save S716 Save Dialog Box The Save dialog box opens when you click Save in the Scan/Import window. In the Save dialog box, you can make settings for saving images to a computer. Save in Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images. To change the folder, click Browse... to specify another one.
Save Dialog Box Page 653 of 1135 pages Important This setting is not available when the Compress scanned images when transferring checkbox is selected on the " General Tab " of the Preferences dialog box. Save to a Subfolder with Current Date Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and save scanned files in it. A subfolder with a name such as "2010_01_01" (Year_Month_Date) will be created.
Save as PDF file Dialog Box Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Page 654 of 1135 pages > MP Navigator EX Screens > Save as PDF file Dialog Box S717 Save as PDF file Dialog Box In the Save as PDF file dialog box, you can make advanced settings for saving scanned images as PDF files. You can save multiple documents as one PDF file or add pages to a PDF file created with MP Navigator EX.
Save as PDF file Dialog Box Page 655 of 1135 pages PDF Save each of the selected images as a separate PDF file. PDF(Multiple Pages) Save multiple images in one PDF file. Note PDF(Multiple Pages) is displayed when multiple images are selected. PDF(Add Page) Add the scanned images to a PDF file. The images are added to the end of the PDF file. You cannot rearrange the pages of the PDF file to which the images are added. Important Images can only be added to PDF files created with MP Navigator EX.
PDF Settings Dialog Box Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Settings Dialog Box Page 656 of 1135 pages > MP Navigator EX Screens > PDF S736 PDF Settings Dialog Box In the PDF Settings dialog box, you can specify the PDF compression type and other advanced settings for creating PDF files. Important Only the Security setting is available for images with resolutions outside the range of 75 dpi to 600 dpi.
PDF Settings Dialog Box Page 657 of 1135 pages - Documents containing figures/images - Hand-written documents - Documents containing both vertical and horizontal lines (tables) PDF Compression Select a compression type for saving. Standard It is recommended that you normally select this setting. High Compresses the file size when saving, allowing you to reduce the load on your network/server. Important Highly compressed PDF images may degrade if you repeatedly save them with high compression.
Memory Card Screen (Scan/Import Window) Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Card Screen (Scan/Import Window) Page 658 of 1135 pages > MP Navigator EX Screens > Memory S710 Memory Card Screen (Scan/Import Window) Select Scan/Import in the Navigation Mode screen and click Memory Card, or click Memory Card in the Scan/Import window to open the Memory Card screen (Scan/Import window).
Memory Card Screen (Scan/Import Window) Memory Card Displays folders of images and PDF files (grouped by year, month/year and month/date/year) on a memory card in tree view. Select a folder to display its contents in the Thumbnail window to the right. File date is the captured or updated date. Import Imports the selected images and open them in the View & Use window. View & Use Window Jump to Main Menu Jumps to the Main Menu. Toolbar Preferences The Preferences dialog box opens.
Memory Card Screen (Scan/Import Window) Page 660 of 1135 pages Selected Images Area Images selected in the Thumbnail window are displayed.
View Use Window Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Use Window Page 661 of 1135 pages > MP Navigator EX Screens > View & S711 View & Use Window Select View & Use in the Navigation Mode screen and click My Box (Scanned/Imported Images), Specify Folder or Recently Saved Images to open the View & Use window. Open this window to display or use scanned images or images saved on a computer.
View Use Window My Box (Scanned/Imported Images) Displays folders of images (grouped by year, month/year and month/date/year) in My Box in tree view. Select a folder to display its contents in the Thumbnail window to the right. Image date is the scanned, captured or updated date. Specify Folder Displays all hard disks and folders in tree view. Select a folder to display images in the Thumbnail window to the right. Selecting a folder and clicking it highlights the folder name, allowing you to rename it.
View Use Window Page 663 of 1135 pages Selects all images in the Thumbnail window. (Cancel All) Cancels all image selections in the Thumbnail window. (Image Correction/Enhancement) Allows you to correct the target image (outlined in orange). Click this button to open the Correct/ Enhance Images window in which you can correct/enhance images and also adjust the brightness, contrast, etc.
View Use Window Imported Images) or Recently Saved Images. Note A lock icon appears for PDF files with Document Open Password set. Thumbnails may appear as "?" in the following cases. - Opening unsupported images - File size is too large and there is not enough memory to display the image - The file is corrupted When Images are Sorted by Categories Scanned images are displayed by category. Note Some images may not be detected correctly and thus may be classified into wrong categories.
View Use Window Page 665 of 1135 pages All Categories Displays all categories and images. Specific Categories Displays categories containing images, along with the contained images. More images will be displayed in the Thumbnail window, allowing you to find or move images easily. Note Immediately after opening the View & Use window, categories containing images appear along with the contained images, and All Categories is displayed. Click All Categories, to changes to Specific Categories.
Create/Edit PDF file Window Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Page 666 of 1135 pages > MP Navigator EX Screens > Create/ Edit PDF file Window S715 Create/Edit PDF file Window Click PDF in the View & Use window, then click Create/Edit PDF file on the list to open the Create/Edit PDF file window. In the Create/Edit PDF file window, you can add/delete pages and rearrange the page order of PDF files created with MP Navigator EX.
Create/Edit PDF file Window Deletes the selected image. Add Page Allows you to select and add an existing PDF file. Note A password will be required to add a password-protected PDF file. Undo Cancels the latest change made. Reset Cancels all the changes made. Save Selected Pages Opens the Save as PDF file dialog box. Specify the save settings. Only the selected page is saved. Note When multiple pages are selected, a multiple-page PDF file is created.
Create/Edit PDF file Window Page 668 of 1135 pages (Reduce) Reduces the image displayed in Preview. (Full-screen) Displays the entire image. (Thumbnail Mode) Switches to Thumbnail Mode. The pages are displayed in thumbnail view.
Print Document Dialog Box Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Page 669 of 1135 pages > MP Navigator EX Screens > Print Document Dialog Box S718 Print Document Dialog Box Click Print in the View & Use window, then click Print Document on the list to open the Print Document dialog box. In the Print Document dialog box, you can make advanced settings for printing multiple scanned images at one time. Printer Select the printer to use.
Print Document Dialog Box Page 670 of 1135 pages Auto Duplex is displayed when Page Layout is Normal-size Printing or Scaled Printing, and available when Media Type is Plain Paper. Staple Side Select a stapling side from the list. Note Staple Side is available when Auto Duplex On is set. Specify Margin... Specify the width of the margin (0 inches to 1.18 inches (0 mm to 30 mm)). Note Specify Margin... is available when Auto Duplex On is set. A page may not fit in one page due to the Specify Margin...
Print Document Dialog Box Page 671 of 1135 pages Defaults Restore the default settings. Print Start printing with the specified settings. Note To cancel while spooling, click Cancel. To cancel while printing, click Cancel Printing in the confirmation window for the printer status. To open a confirmation window for the printer status, click printer icon on the taskbar. Close Close the Print Document dialog box.
Print Photo Dialog Box Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Page 672 of 1135 pages > MP Navigator EX Screens > Print Photo Dialog Box S729 Print Photo Dialog Box Click Print in the View & Use window, then click Print Photo on the list to open the Print Photo dialog box. Important The Print Photo dialog box will not open if Easy-PhotoPrint EX is installed. Easy-PhotoPrint EX starts instead. PDF files cannot be printed.
Print Photo Dialog Box Page 673 of 1135 pages Select this checkbox to print the image on an entire sheet of paper without borders. Important Page Layout setting will be disabled when you select Borderless Printing. This setting is only available with printers that support borderless printing. Orientation Specify the print orientation. Important This setting is available only when Page Layout is Normal-size Printing.
Send via E-mail Dialog Box Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Page 674 of 1135 pages > MP Navigator EX Screens > Send via E-mail Dialog Box S719 Send via E-mail Dialog Box Click Send in the View & Use window, then click Attach to E-mail on the list to open the Send via E-mail dialog box. In the Send via E-mail dialog box, you can make advanced settings for attaching images to e-mail.
Send via E-mail Dialog Box Page 675 of 1135 pages Page top
Correct/Enhance Images Window Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Enhance Images Window Page 676 of 1135 pages > MP Navigator EX Screens > Correct/ S712 Correct/Enhance Images Window Click (Image Correction/Enhancement) in the View & Use window or click Fix photo images in Image Handling Buttons to open the Correct/Enhance Images window.
Correct/Enhance Images Window Auto Photo Fix Applies automatic corrections suitable for photos. Prioritize Exif Info Select this checkbox to apply corrections primarily based on the settings made at the time of shooting. Deselect this checkbox to apply corrections based on the image analysis results. It is recommended that you normally select this setting. Note "Exif" is a standard format for embedding various shooting data in digital camera images (JPEG). Face Sharpener Sharpens out-of-focus faces.
Correct/Enhance Images Window See "Correcting/Enhancing Images Manually " for details. Adjustment Brightness Adjusts the overall image brightness. Move the slider to the left to darken and right to brighten the image. Contrast Adjusts the contrast of the image. Adjust the contrast when the image is flat due to lack of contrast. Move the slider to the left to decrease and right to increase the contrast of the image. Sharpness Emphasizes the outline of the subjects to sharpen the image.
Correct/Enhance Images Window Brightness/Contrast Adjust the brightness and contrast of the image. Move the Brightness slider to the left to darken and right to brighten the image. Move the Contrast slider to the left to decrease and right to increase the contrast of the image. Tone Adjust the brightness balance by specifying Highlight (the brightest level), Shadow (the darkest level) and Midtone (the color in the middle of Highlight and Shadow).
Correct/Enhance Images Window Exit Closes the Correct/Enhance Images window. Correction/Enhancement Face Brightener Corrects the entire image to brighten the facial area in and around the selected area. You can adjust the effect level using the slider. Face Sharpener Corrects the entire image to sharpen the facial area in and around the selected area. You can adjust the effect level using the slider.
Correct/Enhance Images Window (Rotate Right) Rotates the image 90 degrees clockwise. (Invert) Inverts the image horizontally. (Trimming) Trimming is the act of selecting the area you want to keep in a photo and discarding the rest. In the displayed window, drag the white frame to specify the trimming area. Move the cursor inside the white frame and drag to move the trimming area. Note Place the main subjects along the broken white lines or at the intersections to create a balanced image.
Correct/Enhance Images Window Page 682 of 1135 pages Page top
One-click Mode Screen Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Mode Screen Page 683 of 1135 pages > MP Navigator EX Screens > One-click S701 One-click Mode Screen (Switch Mode) at the bottom left of the Navigation Mode screen to display the One-click Click Mode screen. You can complete "from scanning to saving", etc. at one time by simply clicking the corresponding icon. Auto Scan documents by automatically detecting the document type.
One-click Mode Screen Page 684 of 1135 pages Custom Scan with One-click Tab Preferences The Preferences dialog box opens. In the Preferences dialog box, you can make advanced settings to MP Navigator EX functions. Preferences Dialog Box (Guide) Opens this guide. Important The following restrictions apply when you scan with Document Type set to Auto Mode in the Save dialog box or Custom dialog box.
Auto Scan Dialog Box Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Scan Dialog Box Page 685 of 1135 pages > MP Navigator EX Screens > Auto S742 Auto Scan Dialog Box Click Auto Scan on the Custom Scan with One-click tab or click Auto in the One-click Mode screen to open the Auto Scan dialog box. Supported Documents Photos, postcards, business cards, magazines, newspapers, text documents, BD/DVD/CD and film.
Auto Scan Dialog Box Important When this checkbox is selected, the files can be saved in JPEG/Exif or PDF format only. Scanning may take longer than usual when this checkbox is selected. The color tone may change from the source image due to corrections. In that case, deselect the checkbox and scan. Save Settings File name Enter the file name of the image to be saved (up to 64 characters). When saving multiple files, 4 digits are appended to each file name.
Auto Scan Dialog Box Page 687 of 1135 pages Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and save scanned files in it. A subfolder with a name such as "2010_01_01" (Year_Month_Date) will be created. If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in. Start scanning by clicking the one-click button Select this checkbox to start scanning when you click an icon in One-click Mode.
Save Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen) Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen) Page 688 of 1135 pages > MP Navigator EX Screens > Save S721 Save Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen) Click Save to PC on the Custom Scan with One-click tab or click Save in the One-click Mode screen to open the Save dialog box. Scan Settings Document Type Select the type of document to be scanned.
Save Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen) Note To reduce moire, set Document Type to Magazine. Color Mode Select how to scan the document. Document Size Select the size of the document to be scanned. When you select Custom, a screen in which you can specify the document size appears. Select a Units, then enter the Width and Height and click OK. Important When you select Auto Detect, the image may not be scanned at the correct position and size.
Save Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen) You cannot select JPEG/Exif when Color Mode is Black and White. Note When Auto is selected, files are saved in the following formats according to the document type. Photos, postcards, BD/DVD/CD, business cards and film: JPEG Magazines, newspapers and text documents: PDF You can change the file format from Set.... Images saved as PDF files may not open depending on the application. In that case, select an option other than Auto in Save as type.
Save Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen) Page 691 of 1135 pages Open the save dialog box after scanning the image (Input Exif information) Select this to open the Save dialog box after scanning the images and specify the save settings such as destination folder, file name and Exif information. Save Dialog Box Note To set passwords for PDF files, select Open the save dialog box after scanning the image (Input Exif information). After scanning, you can set the passwords in the Save dialog box.
Scan Settings Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen) Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Settings Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen) Page 692 of 1135 pages > MP Navigator EX Screens > Scan S734 Scan Settings Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen) The Scan Settings dialog box opens when you click Specify... in a dialog box of the One-click Mode screen. In the Scan Settings dialog box, you can make advanced scan settings.
Scan Settings Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen) select the type of film and scan again. Place documents correctly according to the type of document to be scanned. Otherwise, documents may not be scanned correctly. See "Placing Documents " for details on how to place documents. Color Mode Select how to scan the document. Color This mode renders the image in 256 levels (8 bit) of R(ed), G(reen), and B(lue). Grayscale This mode renders the image in 256 levels (8 bit) of black and white.
Scan Settings Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen) sharpen text in a document or magazine for better readability. Important When this checkbox is selected, the files can be saved in JPEG/Exif or PDF format only. Scanning may take longer than usual when this checkbox is selected. These functions are not available when the Scan Settings dialog box is opened from the OCR dialog box. Auto Photo Fix is not available when Color Mode is Grayscale or Black and White.
Scan Settings Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen) Page 695 of 1135 pages - Documents containing both vertical and horizontal lines (tables) Note Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable Correct slanted document. Detect the orientation of text documents and rotate images Select this checkbox to detect the orientation of the document from the scanned text and rotate the scanned image to the correct orientation. Select the language of the document to be scanned in Document Language.
Save Dialog Box Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Dialog Box Page 696 of 1135 pages > MP Navigator EX Screens > Save S731 Save Dialog Box The Save dialog box opens when you scan from the Save dialog box or Custom dialog box of the Oneclick Mode screen after selecting Open the save dialog box after scanning the image (Input Exif information). You can specify the file type and destination while viewing the thumbnails.
Save Dialog Box Setting Passwords for PDF Files Important PDF, PDF(Multiple Pages) and PDF(Add Page) cannot be selected for images scanned from the Custom dialog box or Film dialog box. You cannot select JPEG/Exif when Color Mode is Black and White. Set... When Save as type is JPEG/Exif You can specify a compression type for JPEG files. Select High(Low Compression), Standard or Low(High Compression).
Save Dialog Box Page 698 of 1135 pages Page top
Exif Settings Dialog Box Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Settings Dialog Box Page 699 of 1135 pages > MP Navigator EX Screens > Exif S732 Exif Settings Dialog Box You can input Exif information into a file to be saved. "Exif" is a standard format for embedding various shooting data in digital camera images (JPEG). Embedding Exif information into scanned images allows you to organize and print them along with digital camera images.
PDF Dialog Box Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Dialog Box Page 700 of 1135 pages > MP Navigator EX Screens > PDF S725 PDF Dialog Box Click Save as PDF file on the Custom Scan with One-click tab or click PDF in the One-click Mode screen to open the PDF dialog box. Scan Settings Document Type Select the type of document to be scanned. Color Mode Select how to scan the document. Document Size Select the size of the document to be scanned.
PDF Dialog Box Page 701 of 1135 pages that case, change the size to the actual document size (A4, Letter, etc.) and align a corner of the document with the corner at the arrow (alignment mark) of the Platen. Resolution Select the resolution at which to scan documents. Resolution Specify... Opens the Scan Settings dialog box in which you can make advanced scan settings.
PDF Dialog Box Page 702 of 1135 pages Important Images can only be added to PDF files created with MP Navigator EX. You cannot specify PDF files created with other applications. PDF files edited in other applications cannot be specified as well. Save to a Subfolder with Current Date Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and save scanned files in it. A subfolder with a name such as "2010_01_01" (Year_Month_Date) will be created.
Save as PDF file Dialog Box Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Page 703 of 1135 pages > MP Navigator EX Screens > Save as PDF file Dialog Box S730 Save as PDF file Dialog Box The Save as PDF file dialog box opens when you scan from the PDF dialog box of the One-click Mode screen after selecting Open the save dialog box after scanning the image. In the Save as PDF file dialog box, you can make settings for saving images to a computer.
Save as PDF file Dialog Box Page 704 of 1135 pages PDF(Add Page) cannot be selected for images scanned using the Operation Panel of the machine. If a password-protected PDF file is edited, the passwords will be deleted. Reset the passwords. Setting Passwords for PDF Files Set... Make advanced settings for creating PDF files. See " PDF Settings Dialog Box " for details.
Mail Dialog Box Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Dialog Box Page 705 of 1135 pages > MP Navigator EX Screens > Mail S722 Mail Dialog Box Click Attach to E-mail on the Custom Scan with One-click tab or click Mail in the One-click Mode screen to open the Mail dialog box. Scan Settings Document Type Select the type of document to be scanned. Color Mode Select how to scan the document. Document Size Select the size of the document to be scanned.
Mail Dialog Box Resolution Select the resolution at which to scan documents. Resolution Use the scanner driver Select this checkbox to display the ScanGear (scanner driver) screen and make advanced scan settings. Color Mode, Document Size, Resolution and other settings in the Mail dialog box will be disabled. Specify these settings in the ScanGear screen. Specify... Opens the Scan Settings dialog box in which you can make advanced scan settings.
Mail Dialog Box Page 707 of 1135 pages Mail Program Specify an e-mail software program. Note Select Add... to open the Select Mail Program dialog box in which you can select an e-mail software program. If the e-mail software program you want to use is not listed, click Add to List and select it. Start scanning by clicking the one-click button Select this checkbox to start scanning when you click an icon in One-click Mode.
Film Dialog Box Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Dialog Box Page 708 of 1135 pages > MP Navigator EX Screens > Film S723 Film Dialog Box Click Scan film & save on the Custom Scan with One-click tab or click Film in the One-click Mode screen to open the Film dialog box. Scan Settings Document Type Select the type of film to be scanned. When Film(Auto mode) is selected, the film type (negative or positive) is automatically detected.
Film Dialog Box Use the scanner driver Select this checkbox to display the ScanGear (scanner driver) screen and make advanced scan settings. Color Mode, Document Size, Resolution and other settings in the Film dialog box will be disabled. Specify these settings in the ScanGear screen. Specify... Opens the Scan Settings dialog box in which you can make advanced scan settings.
Film Dialog Box Page 710 of 1135 pages underscore is added to the beginning of the file name. (Example: _Image0001.jpg) Open the save dialog box after scanning the image (Input Exif information) Select this to open the Save dialog box after scanning the images and specify the save settings such as destination folder, file name and Exif information. Save Dialog Box Application Settings Open with You can select whether to open the View & Use window or Explorer after saving the images.
OCR Dialog Box Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Dialog Box Page 711 of 1135 pages > MP Navigator EX Screens > OCR S724 OCR Dialog Box Click OCR on the Custom Scan with One-click tab or in the One-click Mode screen to open the OCR dialog box. Scan Settings Document Type Select the type of document to be scanned. Color Mode Select how to scan the document. Document Size Select the size of the document to be scanned.
OCR Dialog Box Select this checkbox to display the ScanGear (scanner driver) screen and make advanced scan settings. Color Mode, Document Size, Resolution and other settings in the OCR dialog box will be disabled. Specify these settings in the ScanGear screen. Specify... Opens the Scan Settings dialog box in which you can make advanced scan settings.
OCR Dialog Box Page 713 of 1135 pages according to the language of the document to be scanned. When scanning multiple documents, you can collect the extracted text into one file. General Tab Text displayed in Notepad (included with Windows) is for guidance only. Text in the image of the following types of documents may not be detected correctly.
Custom Dialog Box Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Dialog Box Page 714 of 1135 pages > MP Navigator EX Screens > Custom S726 Custom Dialog Box Click Custom on the Custom Scan with One-click tab or in the One-click Mode screen to open the Custom dialog box. Scan Settings Document Type Select the type of document to be scanned. When Auto Mode is selected, the document type is automatically detected.
Custom Dialog Box documents may not be scanned correctly. See "Placing Documents " for details on how to place documents. Note To reduce moire, set Document Type to Magazine. Color Mode Select how to scan the document. Document Size Select the size of the document to be scanned. When you select Custom, a screen in which you can specify the document size appears. Select a Units, then enter the Width and Height and click OK.
Custom Dialog Box depending on how you place the document. See "Placing Documents " for details on how to place documents. You cannot select JPEG/Exif when Color Mode is Black and White. Note When Auto is selected, files are saved in the following formats according to the document type. Photos, postcards, BD/DVD/CD, business cards and film: JPEG Magazines, newspapers and text documents: PDF You can change the file format from Set.... Images saved as PDF files may not open depending on the application.
Custom Dialog Box Page 717 of 1135 pages Open the save dialog box after scanning the image (Input Exif information) Select this to open the Save dialog box after scanning the images and specify the save settings such as destination folder, file name and Exif information. Save Dialog Box Application Settings Open with Specify an application with which to open scanned images. Drag and drop the icon of an application that supports the file format displayed in Save as type.
Preferences Dialog Box Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Preferences Dialog Box Page 718 of 1135 pages > MP Navigator EX Screens > S705 Preferences Dialog Box Click Preferences to open the Preferences dialog box. In the Preferences dialog box, you can specify general MP Navigator EX settings and how to respond when scanning using the Operation Panel, via the General and Scanner Button Settings tabs.
General Tab Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Tab Page 719 of 1135 pages > MP Navigator EX Screens > General S740 General Tab On the General tab, you can specify general MP Navigator EX settings. Product Name Displays the product name of the machine that MP Navigator EX is currently configured to use. If the displayed product is not the one you want to use, select the desired product from the list.
General Tab - Black and White cannot be selected in the color mode settings for One-click Mode. - Remove gutter shadow is not available. - Auto Photo Fix and Auto Document Fix are not available. - Save the JPEG/Exif file in AdobeRGB for One-click Mode is not available. - Available resolutions (other than film): 75 dpi / 150 dpi / 300 dpi / 600 dpi - Maximum number of documents that can be scanned at one time: 4 - A compression type (image quality) cannot be selected when saving scanned images in JPEG.
General Tab Page 721 of 1135 pages Document Language Specify the language according to the language of the document to be scanned. Only text written in languages that can be selected in the Document Language can be extracted to Notepad. Combine multiple text conversion results When scanning multiple documents, select the checkbox to collect the conversion results (text) into one file. When the checkbox is selected, you can scan up to 99 pages at one time.
Scanner Button Settings Tab (Save to PC) Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Button Settings Tab (Save to PC) Page 722 of 1135 pages > MP Navigator EX Screens > Scanner S707 Scanner Button Settings Tab (Save to PC) On the Scanner Button Settings tab, you can specify how to respond when scanning using the Operation Panel of the machine. This section describes the settings available when Select Event is Save to PC.
Scanner Button Settings Tab (Save to PC) Page 723 of 1135 pages Document Type Select the type of film to be scanned. When Film(Auto mode) is selected, the film type (negative or positive) is automatically detected. Note To scan black and white film, select Negative Film or Positive Film and touch the Black button on the machine. Resolution Set this item using the Operation Panel of the machine. Specify... Opens the Scan Settings dialog box in which you can make advanced scan settings.
Scanner Button Settings Tab (Save to PC) Page 724 of 1135 pages Specify JPEG on printer's operation panel Click Set... to specify a compression type for JPEG files. Select High(Low Compression), Standard or Low(High Compression). Important This setting is not available when the Compress scanned images when transferring checkbox is selected on the " General Tab " of the Preferences dialog box. Specify PDF on printer's operation panel Click Set... to make advanced settings for creating PDF files.
Scanner Button Settings Tab (Attach to E-mail) Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Button Settings Tab (Attach to E-mail) Page 725 of 1135 pages > MP Navigator EX Screens > Scanner S737 Scanner Button Settings Tab (Attach to E-mail) On the Scanner Button Settings tab, you can specify how to respond when scanning using the Operation Panel of the machine. This section describes the settings available when Select Event is Attach to E-mail.
Scanner Button Settings Tab (Attach to E-mail) Page 726 of 1135 pages Document Type Select the type of film to be scanned. When Film(Auto mode) is selected, the film type (negative or positive) is automatically detected. Note To scan black and white film, select Negative Film or Positive Film and touch the Black button on the machine. Resolution Set this item using the Operation Panel of the machine. Specify... Opens the Scan Settings dialog box in which you can make advanced scan settings.
Scanner Button Settings Tab (Attach to E-mail) Page 727 of 1135 pages If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in. Attachment Settings Mail Program Specify an e-mail software program.
Scan Settings Dialog Box (Scanner Button Settings) Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Settings Dialog Box (Scanner Button Settings) Page 728 of 1135 pages > MP Navigator EX Screens > Scan S743 Scan Settings Dialog Box (Scanner Button Settings) The Scan Settings dialog box opens when you click Specify... on the Scanner Button Settings tab of the Preferences dialog box. In the Scan Settings dialog box, you can make advanced scan settings.
Scan Settings Dialog Box (Scanner Button Settings) Place documents correctly according to the type of document to be scanned. Otherwise, documents may not be scanned correctly. See "Placing Documents " for details on how to place documents. Document Size Set this item using the Operation Panel of the machine. When Document Type is film, 35mm Film is set. Scanning Resolution Set this item using the Operation Panel of the machine.
Scan Settings Dialog Box (Scanner Button Settings) Page 730 of 1135 pages Select this checkbox to detect the orientation of the document from the scanned text and rotate the scanned image to the correct orientation. Select the language of the document to be scanned in Document Language. Important This function may not work properly depending on the document language. Only text documents written in languages that can be selected from Document Language are supported.
Appendix: Opening Files Other than Scanned Images Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Scanned Images Page 731 of 1135 pages > Appendix: Opening Files Other than S011 Appendix: Opening Files Other than Scanned Images You can save or print data other than scanned images using MP Navigator EX.
Importing Images Saved on a Memory Card Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Scanned Images > Importing Images Saved on a Memory Card Page 732 of 1135 pages > Appendix: Opening Files Other than S506 Importing Images Saved on a Memory Card You can import images (including PDF files created via scanning using the Operation Panel) saved on a memory card, and save them to a computer or print them using MP Navigator EX.
Importing Images Saved on a Memory Card Page 733 of 1135 pages If a program selection screen does not appear after inserting a memory card into the machine's Card Slot, start MP Navigator EX from the Start menu, then select Memory Card on the Scan/Import tab of the Navigation Mode screen. Starting MP Navigator EX The Memory Card screen of the Scan/Import window appears, and the images and PDF files saved on the memory card appear in the Thumbnail window.
Importing Images Saved on a Memory Card Page 734 of 1135 pages Save in Displays the folder in which to save the imported images and PDF files. To change the folder, click Browse... to specify another one. By default, the scanned images are saved in the following folders.
Opening Images Saved on a Computer Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Scanned Images > Opening Images Saved on a Computer Page 735 of 1135 pages > Appendix: Opening Files Other than S507 Opening Images Saved on a Computer You can open images saved on a computer and print them or attach them to e-mail using MP Navigator EX. You can also edit them using an application that accompanies the machine. 1. Start MP Navigator EX and open the Navigation Mode screen.
Opening Images Saved on a Computer Page 736 of 1135 pages 4. Select the images you want to use, then select what you want to do with them. See the corresponding sections below for details on using images.
Scanning with Other Application Software Page 737 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software Scanning with Other Application Software What Is ScanGear (Scanner Driver)? Scanning with Advanced Settings Using ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear (Scanner Driver) ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens Appendix: Useful Information on Scanning Page top
What Is ScanGear (Scanner Driver)? Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software Page 738 of 1135 pages > What Is ScanGear (Scanner Driver)? S201 What Is ScanGear (Scanner Driver)? ScanGear (scanner driver) is software required for scanning documents and film. It enables you to specify the output size and make image corrections when scanning. ScanGear can be started from MP Navigator EX or from other applications that are compatible with a standard interface called TWAIN.
What Is ScanGear (Scanner Driver)? Page 739 of 1135 pages Auto Scan Mode Use the Auto Scan Mode tab to scan easily by simply placing the document on the Platen and clicking Scan.
Scanning with Advanced Settings Using ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Page 740 of 1135 pages > Scanning with Advanced Settings Using S200 Scanning with Advanced Settings Using ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Starting ScanGear (scanner driver) Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Scanning documents after making simple image corrections Scanning in Basic Mode Scanning documents after making advanced image corrections and br
Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Page 741 of 1135 pages > Scanning with Advanced Settings Using S202 Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Use ScanGear (scanner driver) to make image corrections and color adjustments when scanning. ScanGear can be started from MP Navigator EX or an application.
Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Page 742 of 1135 pages 2. Click the corresponding icon. The corresponding dialog box opens. 3. Select the Use the scanner driver checkbox in Scan Settings, then click Scan. The ScanGear screen appears. Important Use the scanner driver is not displayed in the Auto Scan dialog box or PDF dialog box. Starting from an Application Follow these steps (example) to start ScanGear from an application. The procedure varies depending on the application.
Scanning in Basic Mode Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Scanning in Basic Mode Page 743 of 1135 pages > Scanning with Advanced Settings Using S203 Scanning in Basic Mode Use the Basic Mode tab to scan easily by following the on-screen steps. This section explains how to scan a single document and how to scan color film. See "Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanner Driver) documents at one time.
Scanning in Basic Mode 3. Click Preview. When Photo or Document is Previewed Preview image appears in the Preview area. Note Colors are adjusted based on the document type selected in Select Source. When Film is Previewed Preview images appear in the Preview area. Images are cropped (scan areas are specified) automatically according to the film size. Select the frames to scan. Important Film cannot be scanned without previewing. 4. Set Destination. 5. Set Output Size.
Scanning in Basic Mode Page 745 of 1135 pages Output size options vary by the item selected in Destination. 6. Adjust the scan area (cropping frame) as required. Adjust the size and position of the cropping frame (scan area) on the preview image. Adjusting Cropping Frames 7. Set Image corrections as required. 8. Click Scan. Starts scanning. Note Click (Information) to open a dialog box in which you can check the current scan settings (document type, etc.).
Scanning in Advanced Mode Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Scanning in Advanced Mode Page 746 of 1135 pages > Scanning with Advanced Settings Using S205 Scanning in Advanced Mode Use the Advanced Mode tab to specify the color mode, output resolution, image brightness, color tone, etc. when scanning. This section explains how to scan a single document.
Scanning in Advanced Mode Page 747 of 1135 pages 3. Set Input Settings. Input Settings 4. Click Preview. Preview image appears in the Preview area. Note If you scan without preview, the show-through reduction function will be active. This function is useful when scanning magazines. However, when scanning photos, the color tone of the scanned image may differ from the source due to the show-through reduction function. In that case, use preview first. 5. Set Output Settings. Output Settings 6.
Scanning in Auto Scan Mode Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Scanning in Auto Scan Mode Page 748 of 1135 pages > Scanning with Advanced Settings Using S207 Scanning in Auto Scan Mode Use the Auto Scan Mode tab to scan easily by automatically detecting the type of document placed on the Platen. Important Supported document types are photos, postcards, business cards, magazines, newspapers, text documents, BD/DVD/CD and film.
Scanning in Auto Scan Mode Page 749 of 1135 pages ScanGear's response after scanning can be specified in Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning on the Scan tab of the Preferences dialog box.
Scanning Film in Advanced Mode Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Scanning Film in Advanced Mode Page 750 of 1135 pages > Scanning with Advanced Settings Using S206 Scanning Film in Advanced Mode Use the Advanced Mode tab to specify the color mode, output resolution, image brightness, color tone, etc. when scanning. This section explains how to scan film. 1. Place the film on the Platen, then start ScanGear (scanner driver).
Scanning Film in Advanced Mode Page 751 of 1135 pages 5. Set Output Settings. Output Settings Note When the data size exceeds 1.8 GB, change the settings to reduce the size. 6. Adjust the cropping frame (scan area), correct image and adjust colors as required. Adjusting Cropping Frames Image Settings Color Adjustment Buttons Note You can correct each image separately. Select the frame you want to correct. 7. Click Scan. Starts scanning.
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanner Dri...
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanner Dri... 3. Click Preview. Thumbnails of the preview images appear in the Preview area. Images are cropped (scan areas are specified) automatically according to the document size. 4. Set Destination. 5. Set Output Size. 6. Adjust the scan areas (cropping frames) and set Image corrections as required. Note You can correct each image separately. Select the frame you want to correct.
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanner Dri... 8. Click Scan. Scanning Multiple Documents in Whole Image View Follow these steps if thumbnails are not displayed correctly when previewed or if you want to scan multiple documents as a single image. Note Positions of slanted documents are not corrected in whole image view. 1. After previewing images, click (Thumbnail) on the Toolbar. Switch to whole image view.
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanner Dri... Page 755 of 1135 pages Note ScanGear's response after scanning can be specified in Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning on the Scan tab of the Preferences dialog box.
Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Page 756 of 1135 pages > Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with S300 Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear (Scanner Driver) The following sections provide you with tips and know-how on advanced scanning techniques involving color/brightness adjustment, etc.
Correcting Images (Unsharp Mask, Reduce Dust and Scratches, Fading... Page 757 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Correcting Images (Unsharp Mask, Reduce Dust and Scratches, Fading Correction, etc.) S308 Correcting Images (Unsharp Mask, Reduce Dust and Scratches, Fading Correction, etc.
Correcting Images (Unsharp Mask, Reduce Dust and Scratches, Fading... type. None Auto Sharpening slightly out-of-focus images Set Unsharp Mask to ON. OFF ON Reducing gradations and stripe patterns Set Descreen to ON. OFF ON Note Printed photos and pictures are displayed as a collection of fine dots. "Moire" is a phenomenon where uneven gradation or a stripe pattern appears when such photos or pictures printed with fine dots are scanned. Descreen is the function for reducing this moire effect.
Correcting Images (Unsharp Mask, Reduce Dust and Scratches, Fading... Correcting photos that have faded with time or due to colorcast Set Fading Correction to Low, Medium or High according to the degree of fading or colorcast. None Medium Reducing graininess Set Grain Correction to Low, Medium or High according to the degree of graininess. None Medium Correcting backlit images Set Backlight Correction to Low, Medium or High according to the degree of backlight.
Correcting Images (Unsharp Mask, Reduce Dust and Scratches, Fading... Page 760 of 1135 pages Scanning film at high quality Click (Down arrow) of Exposure/Tone Settings and set High Quality to ON.
Adjusting Colors Using a Color Pattern Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Adjusting Colors Using a Color Pattern Page 761 of 1135 pages > Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with S301 Adjusting Colors Using a Color Pattern You can preview color changes and reproduce natural colors by using the color pattern function in ScanGear (scanner driver)'s Basic Mode tab.
Adjusting Colors Using a Color Pattern Page 762 of 1135 pages Click an arrow in Color Adjustment to emphasize the corresponding color. Cyan & red, magenta & green and yellow & blue are complementary color pairs (each pair produces a shade of gray when mixed). You can reproduce the natural colors of the scene by reducing the cast color and increasing the complementary color.
Adjusting Saturation and Color Balance Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Adjusting Saturation and Color Balance Page 763 of 1135 pages > Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with S303 Adjusting Saturation and Color Balance In ScanGear (scanner driver)'s Advanced Mode tab, click (Saturation/Color Balance). Note Click Defaults to reset all adjustments in the current window. Saturation Adjust the image's saturation (vividness).
Adjusting Saturation and Color Balance Page 764 of 1135 pages entire picture due to the weather or ambient strong colors. Move (Slider) under Color Balance to the left or right to emphasize the corresponding color. Cyan & Red Magenta & Green Yellow & Blue These are complementary color pairs (each pair produces a shade of gray when mixed). You can reproduce the natural colors of the scene by reducing the cast color and increasing the complementary color.
Adjusting Brightness and Contrast Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Adjusting Brightness and Contrast Page 765 of 1135 pages > Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with S304 Adjusting Brightness and Contrast In ScanGear (scanner driver)'s Advanced Mode tab, click (Brightness/Contrast). Note (Down arrow) to switch to detailed view. Click (Up arrow) to return to the previous view.
Adjusting Brightness and Contrast Page 766 of 1135 pages Note Only Grayscale will be displayed in Channel when Color Mode is Grayscale or Grayscale(16bit). Brightness Adjust the image brightness. Move (Slider) under Brightness to the left to darken and right to brighten the image. You can also enter a value (-127 to 127). Darkened Original image Brightened Note Highlights may be lost if you brighten the image too much, and shadows may be lost if you darken the image too much.
Adjusting Histogram Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Adjusting Histogram Page 767 of 1135 pages > Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with S305 Adjusting Histogram In ScanGear (scanner driver)'s Advanced Mode tab, click (Histogram). Note Click Defaults to reset all adjustments in the current window. Channel Each dot of an image is a mixture of Red, Green and Blue in various proportions (gradation).
Adjusting Histogram Page 768 of 1135 pages (1) Bright area (2) Dark area More data is distributed to the highlight side. More data is distributed to the (3) Whole image shadow side. Data is widely distributed between the highlight and shadow. Adjusting Histograms (Using the Slider) Select a Channel, then move set as the shadow or highlight.
Adjusting Histogram Page 769 of 1135 pages Moving the Mid-point Slider Move the Mid-point Slider to specify the level to be set as the middle of the tonal range. Images with more data distributed to the highlight side Move the Mid-point Slider toward the highlight side. Images with more data distributed to the shadow side Move the Mid-point Slider toward the shadow side.
Adjusting Tone Curve Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Adjusting Tone Curve Page 770 of 1135 pages > Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with S306 Adjusting Tone Curve In ScanGear (scanner driver)'s Advanced Mode tab, click (Tone Curve Settings). Note Click Defaults to reset all adjustments in the current window. Channel Each dot of an image is a mixture of Red, Green and Blue in various proportions (gradation).
Adjusting Tone Curve Adjusting Tone Curve In Select Tone Curve, select a tone curve from No correction, Overexposure, Underexposure, High contrast, Reverse the negative/positive image and Edit custom curve. No correction (No adjustment) Overexposure (Convex curve) The midtone data of the input side is stretched toward the highlight of the output side, resulting in a bright-toned image when viewed on a monitor.
Adjusting Tone Curve Page 772 of 1135 pages Edit custom curve You can drag specific points on the Tone Curve to freely adjust the brightness of the corresponding areas.
Setting Threshold Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Setting Threshold Page 773 of 1135 pages > Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with S307 Setting Threshold The brightness of color and grayscale images is expressed in a value between 0 and 255. However, in creating black and white images, all colors are mapped to either black (0) or white (255). "Threshold" is the borderline value that determines a color as black or white.
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software Page 774 of 1135 pages > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens S800 ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens The following sections describe ScanGear (scanner driver)'s screens and functions, and how to use ScanGear.
Basic Mode Tab Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software Basic Mode Tab Page 775 of 1135 pages > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens > S801 Basic Mode Tab This mode allows you to scan easily by following the on-screen steps. This section describes the settings and functions available on the Basic Mode tab. (1) Settings and Operation Buttons (2) Toolbar (3) Preview Area Note The displayed items vary by document type and how the screen was opened.
Basic Mode Tab Note To scan black and white film, scan from the Advanced Mode tab. Scanning Film in Advanced Mode When you select a document type, the unsharp mask function will be active. The image adjustment function which adjusts images based on the document type will also be active. If you select Magazine(Color), the descreen function will be active. Display Preview Image Preview Performs a trial scan. Note When using the machine for the first time, scanner calibration starts automatically.
Basic Mode Tab displayed, each frame is scanned individually. In whole image view When no cropping frame is displayed, the entire Preview area will be scanned. When a cropping frame is displayed, the portion within the cropping frame will be scanned. Paper Size (L, A4, etc.) Select an output paper size. The portion within the cropping frame will be scanned at the size of the selected paper size. You can drag the cropping frame to enlarge/reduce it while maintaining the aspect ratio.
Basic Mode Tab If an area is not specified, the document will be scanned at the document size (Auto Crop) or film size. If an area is specified, only the portion in the cropping frame will be scanned. Adjusting Cropping Frames Image corrections Allows you to apply corrections to images. Important Available functions vary by the document type selected in Select Source.
Basic Mode Tab Page 779 of 1135 pages Close Closes ScanGear. Toolbar Toolbar You can adjust or rotate preview images. The buttons displayed on the Toolbar vary by view. When Select Source is other than film and in thumbnail view When Select Source is other than film and in whole image view When Select Source is film and in thumbnail view When Select Source is film and in whole image view (Thumbnail) / (Whole Image) Switches the view in the Preview area when document type is other than film.
Basic Mode Tab Page 780 of 1135 pages Selects the checkbox of the image in thumbnail view. (Uncheck All Frames) This button is available when two or more frames are displayed. Deselects the checkbox of the image in thumbnail view. (Select All Frames) This button is available when two or more frames are displayed. Selects the image in thumbnail view and the image will be outlined in blue. (Select All Cropping Frames) This button is available when there are two or more cropping frames.
Basic Mode Tab Page 781 of 1135 pages pressing the Ctrl key. - Unselected (no outline): The settings will not be applied. (Frame Advance) at the bottom of Double-click a frame to zoom in on the image. Click the screen to display the previous or next frame. Double-click the frame again to return the display to its non-magnified state.
Advanced Mode Tab Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software Advanced Mode Tab Page 782 of 1135 pages > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens > S803 Advanced Mode Tab This mode allows you to make advanced scan settings such as the color mode, output resolution, image brightness and color tone. This section describes the settings and functions available on the Advanced Mode tab.
Advanced Mode Tab Page 783 of 1135 pages Enter Setting Name and click Add. The name appears in Favorite Settings List. When you click Save, the item appears in the Favorite Settings list and can be selected, along with the predefined items. To delete an item, select it in Favorite Settings List and click Delete. Click Save to save settings displayed in Favorite Settings List. Note You can set Add/Delete... in Favorite Settings after preview. Save up to 10 items.
Advanced Mode Tab Preview Performs a trial scan. Scan Scanning starts. Note When scanning starts, the progress will be displayed. Click Cancel to cancel the scan. When scanning is completed, a dialog box prompting you to select the next action may open. Follow the prompt to complete. For details, see Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning in " Scan Tab" (Preferences dialog box). It will take time to process the images if the total size of the scanned images exceeds a certain size.
Advanced Mode Tab Page 785 of 1135 pages When Select Source is film and in whole image view (Thumbnail) / (Whole Image) Switches the view in the Preview area when document type is Platen. Preview Area (Film Thumbnail) / (Whole Film Image) Switches the view in the Preview area when document type is film. Preview Area (Clear) Click this button to delete the preview image. It also resets the Toolbar and color adjustment settings. (Crop) Allows you to specify the scan area by dragging the mouse.
Advanced Mode Tab Page 786 of 1135 pages (Uncheck All Frames) This button is available when two or more frames are displayed. Deselects the checkbox of the image in thumbnail view. (Select All Frames) This button is available when two or more frames are displayed. Selects the image in thumbnail view and the image will be outlined in blue. (Display Film Cropping Frame) Displays the cropping frame according to the film size selected in Film Size.
Advanced Mode Tab Page 787 of 1135 pages - Focus Frame (thick blue outline): The displayed settings will be applied. - Selected Frame (thin blue outline): The settings will be applied to the Focus Frame and Selected Frames simultaneously. You can select multiple images by clicking them while pressing the Ctrl key. - Unselected (no outline): The settings will not be applied.
Input Settings Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software Settings Page 788 of 1135 pages > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens > Input S804 Input Settings Input Settings allows you to set the following items: Select Source The type of document to be scanned is displayed. Paper Size Select the size of the document to be scanned. This setting is available in whole image view only. When you select a size, the Preview area size changes accordingly.
Input Settings Page 789 of 1135 pages film to be scanned. Note Click (Film Thumbnail) or (Whole Film Image) on the Toolbar to switch views. Color Mode Select how to scan the document. Color Select this mode to scan color documents or film, or to create color images. This mode renders the image in 256 levels (8 bit) of R(ed), G(reen), and B(lue). Color(48bit) Select this mode to scan color photos or film. This mode renders the image in 65536 levels (16 bit) of R(ed), G(reen), and B(lue).
Output Settings Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software Output Settings Page 790 of 1135 pages > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens > S805 Output Settings Output Settings allows you to set the following items: Output Resolution Select the resolution to scan at. The higher the resolution (value), the more detail in your image.
Output Settings Output Settings or specify a value (by 1%) for %. The maximum value available for % depends on the Output Resolution. % can be specified for up to 19200 dpi (the maximum available output resolution). Paper Size (L, etc.) & Monitor Size (1024 x 768 pixels, etc.) (Width), (Height) and scale cannot be specified. The preview image will be cropped according to the selected output size and resolution.
Output Settings Page 792 of 1135 pages message appears when you click Scan. It is recommended that you adjust the settings to reduce Data Size. To continue, scan in whole image view.
Image Settings Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software Image Settings Page 793 of 1135 pages > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens > S806 Image Settings Important Do not apply these functions to images without moire, dust/scratches or faded colors. The color tone may be adversely affected. Image correction results may not be reflected in the preview image. Note Selectable settings depend on color mode settings. Scanning may take longer when you use Image Settings.
Image Settings Applies Image Adjustment suitable for photos and film. Magazine Applies Image Adjustment suitable for magazines. Newspaper Applies Image Adjustment suitable for newspapers. Document Applies Image Adjustment suitable for text documents. Important You can set Image Adjustment after preview. You can set this setting when Recommended is selected on the Color Settings tab of the Preferences dialog box. Note Only Photo and None are available when Select Source is film.
Image Settings Fading Correction Use this function to correct photos and film that have faded with time or have a colorcast. "Colorcast" is a phenomenon where a specific color affects the entire picture due to the weather or ambient strong colors. None Fading correction will not be applied. Low Select this to correct a small amount of fading and colorcast. Medium It is recommended that you normally select this setting. High Select this to correct a large amount of fading and colorcast.
Image Settings Backlight Correction may not be effective if the scan area is too small. Note Noise patterns may appear when Backlight Correction is applied. Applying Grain Correction and setting Unsharp Mask to OFF may reduce the noise patterns. Gutter Shadow Correction Use this function to correct shadows that appear between pages when scanning open booklets. When you set the Gutter Shadow Correction setting in the preview image, the result will be reflected.
Image Settings Page 797 of 1135 pages Adjusting Cropping Frames Exposure/Tone Settings (Film only) Manual Exposure This function enables you to adjust the exposure data according to the film. When this checkbox is not selected, the optimal exposure data (the exposure level for each RGB channel and compensation levels) is automatically set according to the color density of the portion within the cropping area of the film.
Color Adjustment Buttons Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software Adjustment Buttons Page 798 of 1135 pages > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens > Color S807 Color Adjustment Buttons The Color Adjustment Buttons allow you to make fine corrections to the image brightness and color tones. You can adjust the image's overall brightness or contrast, and adjust its highlight and shadow values (histogram) or balance (tone curve).
Color Adjustment Buttons (Histogram) A histogram allows you to see the data concentration at each brightness level of an image. You can specify the darkest level (shadow) and brightest level (highlight) within an image, cut the levels and expand the middle of the tonal range of the image. Adjusting Histogram (Tone Curve Settings) Adjust the brightness of an image by selecting the type of graph (tone curve) showing the balance of tone input and output.
Color Adjustment Buttons Page 800 of 1135 pages Enter Setting Name and click Add. The name appears in Tone Curve Settings List or Threshold Settings List. Click Save to save. You can load and apply the saved tone curve/threshold settings to a preview image. To load the settings, select the saved item from the pull-down menu. To delete an item, select it in Tone Curve Settings List or Threshold Settings List and click Delete.
Auto Scan Mode Tab Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software Page 801 of 1135 pages > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens > Auto Scan Mode Tab S813 Auto Scan Mode Tab This mode allows you to scan easily by simply placing documents on the Platen and clicking a button. On the Auto Scan Mode tab, documents are automatically detected. You do not need to specify cropping frames or make image corrections.
Auto Scan Mode Tab Page 802 of 1135 pages Execute recommended image correction Select this checkbox to apply suitable corrections automatically based on the document type. Important When this checkbox is selected in ScanGear started from MP Navigator EX, the files can be saved in JPEG/Exif or PDF format only. Scanning may take longer than usual when this checkbox is selected. You can set this setting when Recommended is selected on the Color Settings tab of the Preferences dialog box.
Preferences Dialog Box Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software Preferences Dialog Box Page 803 of 1135 pages > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens > S808 Preferences Dialog Box Click Preferences... in the ScanGear (scanner driver) screen to open Preferences dialog box. In the Preferences dialog box, you can make advanced settings to ScanGear functions via the Scanner, Preview, Scan and Color Settings tabs.
Scanner Tab Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software Scanner Tab Page 804 of 1135 pages > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens > S812 Scanner Tab On the Scanner tab, you can specify the following settings. Quiet Mode Select this checkbox to reduce scanner sound by slowing down the scanner head when previewing or scanning documents. Note Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable this function.
Scanner Tab Page 805 of 1135 pages Page top
Preview Tab Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software Preview Tab Page 806 of 1135 pages > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens > S809 Preview Tab On the Preview tab, you can specify the following settings. Preview at Start of ScanGear Select what to do with Preview when ScanGear (scanner driver) is started. Automatically Execute Preview ScanGear will automatically start previewing at startup. Display Saved Preview Image The previously previewed image will be displayed.
Preview Tab Page 807 of 1135 pages No cropping frame will be displayed after previewing. Cropping Size for Thumbnail View Select the cropping size for thumbnails of scanned documents and film. Larger Displays 105% (in width and height) of the area displayed for the standard size. Standard The standard size. Smaller Displays 95% (in width and height) of the area displayed for the standard size.
Scan Tab Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software Tab Page 808 of 1135 pages > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens > Scan S810 Scan Tab On the Scan tab, you can specify the following settings. Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning Select what to do with ScanGear (scanner driver) after scanning images. Close ScanGear automatically Select this to return to the original application when scanning is completed.
Scan Tab Page 809 of 1135 pages Set a Smaller Film Cropping Size Select this checkbox to display 95% (in width and height) of the area displayed for the standard film size. Important This setting is not applied when scanning with the ScanGear screen displayed. Advanced Mode Settings Enable 48/16 bit Output When Select Source is film on the Advanced Mode tab, select this checkbox to display Color(48bit) and Grayscale(16bit) in Color Mode.
Color Settings Tab Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software Settings Tab Page 810 of 1135 pages > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens > Color S811 Color Settings Tab On the Color Settings tab, you can specify the following settings. Color Adjustment Select either of the following. You can select one when Color Mode is Color, Color(48bit), Grayscale or Grayscale(16bit). Recommended Select this to vividly reproduce the tone of a document on the screen.
Color Settings Tab Page 811 of 1135 pages characteristics of the monitor. Adjust the value if your monitor's gamma value does not match the default value set in ScanGear, and the colors of the original image are not accurately reflected in the monitor. Click Defaults to return to the default Monitor Gamma value (2.20). Note Refer to the manual of your monitor to check its gamma value. If it is not written in the manual, contact the manufacturer.
Appendix: Useful Information on Scanning Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software Page 812 of 1135 pages > Appendix: Useful Information on Scanning S012 Appendix: Useful Information on Scanning Adjusting the cropping frame (scan area) Adjusting Cropping Frames Selecting the best resolution Resolution Learning about file formats File Formats Learning about Color Matching Color Matching Matching the colors between the document and monitor See Monitor Gamma in the followin
Adjusting Cropping Frames Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software Adjusting Cropping Frames Page 813 of 1135 pages > Appendix: Useful Information on Scanning S802 Adjusting Cropping Frames You can specify the scan area by creating a cropping frame on the image displayed in the Preview area of the ScanGear (scanner driver) screen. When you click Scan, only the portion within the cropping frame will be scanned and passed to the application.
Adjusting Cropping Frames The cursor will change into (Crosshair arrow) when it is positioned within a cropping frame. Click and drag the mouse to move the entire cropping frame. Note In Advanced Mode tab, you can specify the cropping frame size by entering the values into (Width) and (Height) in Input Settings. Input Settings (Switch Aspect Ratio). However, You can rotate a cropping frame 90 degrees by clicking (Switch Aspect Ratio) is not available when Output Size is Flexible.
Adjusting Cropping Frames Page 815 of 1135 pages You can create multiple cropping frames and apply different scan settings to each cropping frame. You can also select multiple cropping frames by clicking them while pressing the Ctrl key. If you select multiple cropping frames and change the settings on a tab at the right of ScanGear, the settings will be applied to all the selected cropping frames. When you create a new cropping frame, it retains the settings of the latest cropping frame.
Resolution Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software Page 816 of 1135 pages > Appendix: Useful Information on Scanning Resolution S309 Resolution What is Resolution? The data in the image you have scanned is a collection of dots carrying information about brightness and color. The density of these dots is called "resolution", and resolution will determine the amount of detail your image contains. The unit of resolution is dots per inch (dpi).
Resolution Document resolution: 300 dpi Scanning resolution: 600 Page 817 of 1135 pages Print at twice the size Scanning resolution/actual scanning resolution: 600 dpi Printing resolution: 300 dpi dpi Scale: 200% When Printing Color Film at L Size Document resolution: 300 dpi Scanning resolution: 1200 Print at four times the size Scanning resolution/actual scanning resolution: 1200 dpi Printing resolution: 300 dpi dpi Scale: 400% Setting the Resolution in ScanGear (Scanner Driver) In ScanGear, y
Resolution Page 818 of 1135 pages Although you can change Output Resolution in ScanGear, it is recommended that you scan at the default value.
File Formats Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software Page 819 of 1135 pages > Appendix: Useful Information on Scanning File Formats S310 File Formats You can select a file format when saving scanned images. You should specify the most suitable format according to how you want to use the image on which application. Available file formats vary by application and computer (Windows or Macintosh). See below for the characteristics of each image file format.
Color Matching Page 820 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Appendix: Useful Information on Scanning Color Matching S815 Color Matching Color Matching adjusts devices as shown below to match the colors of an image displayed on a monitor or a printed image with the colors of the original document.
Canon IJ Network Scan Utility Screens Page 821 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Canon IJ Network Scan Utility Screens Canon IJ Network Scan Utility Screens Canon IJ Network Scan Utility Menu and Setting Screen Page top
Canon IJ Network Scan Utility Menu and Setting Screen Advanced Guide > Scanning > Canon IJ Network Scan Utility Screens Screen > Canon IJ Network Scan Utility Menu and Setting S814 Canon IJ Network Scan Utility Menu and Setting Screen Set up Canon IJ Network Scan Utility to scan images into a computer over a network using the Operation Panel of the machine. After installation, Canon IJ Network Scan Utility appears in the notification area of the taskbar.
Canon IJ Network Scan Utility Menu and Setting Screen Page 823 of 1135 pages Select the product you want to use. Scanners that are registered to the system are displayed. Select the checkbox of the product you want to use. You can select up to three scanners. Click Instructions to open this page. Note If the scanner you want to use is not displayed, check the following conditions and click OK to close the dialog box, then reopen it and select the scanner.
Other Scanning Methods Page 824 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Other Scanning Methods Other Scanning Methods Scanning with WIA Driver Scanning Using the Control Panel (Windows XP Only) Page top
Scanning with WIA Driver Advanced Guide > Scanning > Other Scanning Methods > Scanning with WIA Driver S604 Scanning with WIA Driver You can scan an image from a WIA-compliant application and use the image in that application. WIA (Windows Image Acquisition) is a driver model implemented in Windows XP or later. It allows you to scan documents without using an application. Scan documents from a TWAIN-compliant application to specify advanced settings for scanning.
Scanning with WIA Driver Page 826 of 1135 pages Profile, select Add profile.... You can specify the details in the Add New Profile dialog box. Source Select a scanner type. Paper size This setting is not available for this machine. Color format Select how to scan the document. File type Select a file format from JPEG, BMP, PNG and TIFF. Resolution (DPI) Enter the resolution. Specify a value between 50 dpi and 600 dpi. 300 dpi is set by default.
Scanning with WIA Driver Page 827 of 1135 pages Note With network connection, an image type that can be selected may differ from that for USB connection. To scan with the values previously set in Adjust the quality of the scanned picture, select Custom Settings. 4. Click Adjust the quality of the scanned picture and set the preferences as required. Brightness Move the slider to adjust the brightness. Move it to the left to darken and right to brighten the image. You can also enter a value (-127 to 127).
Scanning with WIA Driver Page 828 of 1135 pages When scanning is completed, the scanned image appears in the application.
Scanning Using the Control Panel (Windows XP Only) Page 829 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Other Scanning Methods > Scanning Using the Control Panel (Windows XP Only) S605 Scanning Using the Control Panel (Windows XP Only) You can scan images via the Control Panel of Windows XP using the WIA driver. Important With network connection, you cannot scan using the WIA driver. You cannot scan film using the Control Panel. 1. From the Start menu, select Control Panel. 2.
Scanning Using the Control Panel (Windows XP Only) Page 830 of 1135 pages Brightness Move the slider to adjust the brightness. Move it to the left to darken and right to brighten the image. You can also enter a value (-127 to 127). Contrast Move the slider to adjust the contrast. Moving it to the left will decrease the contrast of the image, thus softening the image. Moving it to the right will increase the contrast of the image, thus sharpening the image. You can also enter a value (-127 to 127).
About Disc Label Printing Page 831 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > About Disc Label Printing About Disc Label Printing Printing a Disc Label Troubleshooting Page top
Printing a Disc Label Page 832 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > About Disc Label Printing > Printing a Disc Label Printing a Disc Label Items to Prepare Cautions When Printing on the Disc Label Attaching/Removing the Disc Tray Printing on the Disc Label Printing with CD-LabelPrint from the Computer Printing Area Page top
Items to Prepare Page 833 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > About Disc Label Printing > Printing a Disc Label > Items to Prepare D018 Items to Prepare The following items are needed to print onto the printable disc: Disc Tray "G" is on the upper side. 3.15 inches / 8 cm Disc Adapter Needed only when printing on 3.15 inches / 8 cm printable discs. Attached to the Disc Tray when shipped. Important You need to print from the computer to print on 3.15 inches / 8 cm printable discs.
Cautions When Printing on the Disc Label Page 834 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > About Disc Label Printing > Printing a Disc Label > Cautions When Printing on the Disc Label D001 Cautions When Printing on the Disc Label Be sure to use the Disc Tray supplied with this machine. It has an "G" on the upper side. Do not print on printable discs that are not compatible with inkjet printing. The ink will not dry and may cause problems with the disc itself or devices which the disc is loaded onto.
Attaching/Removing the Disc Tray Advanced Guide > About Disc Label Printing > Printing a Disc Label > Attaching/Removing the Disc Tray D013 Attaching/Removing the Disc Tray The external appearance may differ depending on the machine you are using. Attaching the Disc Tray Important Do not attach the Disc Tray until the message asking you to load the printable disc is displayed. Doing so can damage the machine. 1. Open the Paper Output Tray (A). 2.
Attaching/Removing the Disc Tray Page 836 of 1135 pages 1. Align the protrusions on both edges of the 3.15 inches / 8 cm Disc Adapter with indentations on the Disc Tray. 2. Place the 3.15 inches / 8 cm printable disc on the Disc Tray with the printing surface facing up. 4. Attach the Disc Tray to the machine. Note The Disc Tray may be ejected after a specified period of time has elapsed. In this case, follow the on-screen instructions to attach the Disc Tray. 5.
Attaching/Removing the Disc Tray Removing the Disc Tray 1. Pull out the Disc Tray. 2. Close the Inner Cover. Important If the Inner Cover is opened, you cannot print on paper as it will not feed properly. Make sure that the Inner Cover is closed. 3. Remove the printable disc from the Disc Tray. Important Do not touch the printing surface when removing the disc from the Disc Tray. Note Dry the printing surface sufficiently before removing the disc.
Attaching/Removing the Disc Tray Page 838 of 1135 pages 3.15 inches / 8 cm printable disc: 1. Remove the 3.15 inches / 8 cm Disc Adapter from the Disc Tray. 2. Remove the 3.15 inches / 8 cm printable disc from the Disc Tray. Important The Disc Tray cannot be used if it becomes warped. Be sure to keep the Disc Tray on a flat place.
Printing on the Disc Label Page 839 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > About Disc Label Printing > Printing a Disc Label > Printing on the Disc Label D002 Printing on the Disc Label The Disc Tray (supplied) allows the printing of images on printable discs (BD/DVD/CD etc.). Note We recommend that you test print on an unneeded printable disc first. Using Useful Disc Label Printing Functions Choose either of the method below according to your purpose.
Printing on the Disc Label Page 840 of 1135 pages 3. Select 4. Use the selection. button to select Print settings, then use the 5. Use the selection. button to select Adjust disc print area, then use the 6. Use the print area. button to select Right/left or Top/bottom and use the Device settings, then use the OK button to confirm the selection. OK button to confirm the OK button to confirm the button to adjust the You can adjust the printing area by 0.003 inches / 0.1 mm between -0.
Printing with CD-LabelPrint from the Computer Page 841 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > About Disc Label Printing > Printing a Disc Label > Printing with CD-LabelPrint from the Computer D007 Printing with CD-LabelPrint from the Computer CD-LabelPrint is bundled application software that allows you to edit and modify data before Setup CD-ROM into printing. Install it on your computer to use it.
Printing Area Page 842 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > About Disc Label Printing > Printing a Disc Label > Printing Area D015 Printing Area Printable Discs The printing area of the printable disc is the area excluding the 0.03 inches / 1 mm area from the internal and external diameters of the label.
Troubleshooting Page 843 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > About Disc Label Printing > Troubleshooting Troubleshooting An Error Message Is Displayed on the LCD Message Appears on the Computer Screen Cannot Print on the Disc Label Error Message Appears on a PictBridge Compliant Device Page top
An Error Message Is Displayed on the LCD Page 844 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > About Disc Label Printing > Troubleshooting > An Error Message Is Displayed on the LCD D008 An Error Message Is Displayed on the LCD If an error message is displayed on the LCD, take the corresponding action described below. Action Message Open the inner cover, set the disc tray and press OK.
Message Appears on the Computer Screen Page 845 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > About Disc Label Printing > Troubleshooting > Message Appears on the Computer Screen D009 Message Appears on the Computer Screen Errors About Disc Label Printing Are Displayed Check 1: If the Inner Cover is closed when starting disc label printing. Open the Inner Cover, properly place the Disc Tray again, then use the machine to dismiss the error.
Cannot Print on the Disc Label Page 846 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > About Disc Label Printing > Troubleshooting > Cannot Print on the Disc Label D010 Cannot Print on the Disc Label Disc Label Printing Does Not Start Disc Tray Does Not Feed Properly Disc Tray Jammed Disc Label Printing Does Not Start Check 1: Is the Disc Tray placed properly? Open the Inner Cover, properly place the Disc Tray again, then use the machine to dismiss the error.
Cannot Print on the Disc Label Page 847 of 1135 pages check box prevents the Disc Tray from getting dirty. Disc Tray Jammed Pull out the Disc Tray gently. If the Disc Tray cannot be pulled out, turn the machine off, then turn the machine back on again. The Disc Tray will automatically be ejected. When the Disc Tray is pulled out, place the Disc Tray ("G" is on the upper side) again, then retry printing. Place the printable disc properly.
Error Message Appears on a PictBridge Compliant Device Page 848 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > About Disc Label Printing > Troubleshooting > Error Message Appears on a PictBridge Compliant Device D011 Error Message Appears on a PictBridge Compliant Device The following are the possible errors that may occur when printing directly from a PictBridge compliant device and the countermeasures to clear them.
Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device Page 849 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device Printing Photographs Directly from a PictBridge Compliant Device Page top
Printing Photographs Directly from a PictBridge Compliant Device Advanced Guide > Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device Page 850 of 1135 pages > Printing Photographs Directly from a PictBridge Compliant Device Printing Photographs Directly from a PictBridge Compliant Device Printing Photographs Directly from a PictBridge Compliant Device About PictBridge Print Settings Printing Photographs on the Disc Label from a PictBridge Compliant Device Page top
Printing Photographs Directly from a PictBridge Compliant Device Advanced Guide > Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device > Printing Photographs Directly from a PictBridge Compliant Device > Printing Photographs Directly from a PictBridge Compliant Device U052 Printing Photographs Directly from a PictBridge Compliant Device You can connect a PictBridge compliant device such as a digital camera, camcorder, or mobile phone connect to the machine using a USB cable recommended by the device's
Printing Photographs Directly from a PictBridge Compliant Device Page 852 of 1135 pages 5. Specify the print settings such as the paper type and layout. You can perform settings using the menu on the LCD of your PictBridge compliant device. Select the size and type of paper that you loaded in the machine. Settings on a PictBridge Compliant Device If your PictBridge compliant device does not have a setting menu, change the setting from the machine. Settings on the Machine 6.
About PictBridge Print Settings Advanced Guide > Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device PictBridge Compliant Device > About PictBridge Print Settings Page 853 of 1135 pages > Printing Photographs Directly from a U053 About PictBridge Print Settings Settings on a PictBridge Compliant Device Settings on the Machine Settings on a PictBridge Compliant Device This section describes the PictBridge function of the machine.
About PictBridge Print Settings Page 854 of 1135 pages *1 Photos are optimized for printing using the Photo optimizer pro function. *2 Can be selected only on certain Canon-brand PictBridge compliant devices. (May not be selected depending on the device.) Trimming Default (Off: No trimming), On (follow the camera's setting), Off Settings on the Machine You can change the PictBridge print settings from the PictBridge print settings screen.
Printing Photographs on the Disc Label from a PictBridge Compliant De... Advanced Guide > Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device > Printing Photographs Directly from a PictBridge Compliant Device > Printing Photographs on the Disc Label from a PictBridge Compliant Device D016 Printing Photographs on the Disc Label from a PictBridge Compliant Device This section describes how to print photos onto printable discs from a PictBridge compliant device.
Printing Photographs on the Disc Label from a PictBridge Compliant De... Page 856 of 1135 pages Note For details on how to select a menu on the HOME screen, refer to Machine . 3. Select 4. Select PictBridge print settings, then use the 5. Confirm the message, then use the OK button to go the next step. 6. Select Disc label print setting, then use the Overview of the Device settings, then use the OK button to confirm the selection. OK button to confirm the selection.
Maintenance Page 857 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Maintenance Maintenance Cleaning Your Machine Aligning the Print Head Manually Performing Maintenance from a Computer Page top
Cleaning Your Machine Page 858 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Maintenance > Cleaning Your Machine Cleaning Your Machine Cleaning Cleaning the Exterior of the Machine Cleaning the Platen Glass and Document Cover Cleaning the Inside of the Machine (Bottom Plate Cleaning) Cleaning the Protrusions inside the Machine Page top
Cleaning Page 859 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Maintenance > Cleaning Your Machine > Cleaning U059 Cleaning This section describes the cleaning procedure that is needed to maintain your machine. Important Do not use tissue paper, paper towels, rough-textured cloth, or similar materials for cleaning so as not to scratch the surface. Paper tissue powder or fine threads may remain inside the machine and cause problems such as print head blockage and poor printing results. Be sure to use a soft cloth.
Cleaning the Exterior of the Machine Page 860 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Maintenance > Cleaning Your Machine > Cleaning the Exterior of the Machine U060 Cleaning the Exterior of the Machine Be sure to use a soft cloth such as eyeglasses cleaning cloth and wipe off dirt on the surface gently. Smooth out wrinkles on the cloth if necessary before cleaning. Important Be sure to turn off the power and disconnect the power plug before cleaning the machine.
Cleaning the Platen Glass and Document Cover Page 861 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Maintenance > Cleaning Your Machine > Cleaning the Platen Glass and Document Cover U061 Cleaning the Platen Glass and Document Cover Important Be sure to turn off the power and disconnect the power plug before cleaning the machine. With a clean, soft, lint-free cloth, wipe the Platen Glass (A), the FAU (Film Adapter Unit) Protective Sheet (white sheet) (B), and the FAU lamp (C) gently.
Cleaning the Inside of the Machine (Bottom Plate Cleaning) Page 862 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Maintenance > Cleaning Your Machine > Cleaning the Inside of the Machine (Bottom Plate Cleaning) U062 Cleaning the Inside of the Machine (Bottom Plate Cleaning) This section explains how to clean the inside of the machine. If the inside of the machine becomes dirty, printed paper may get dirty, so we recommend performing cleaning regularly. 1. Make sure that the machine is turned on. 2.
Cleaning the Inside of the Machine (Bottom Plate Cleaning) Page 863 of 1135 pages (A) Load the paper after unfolding it. The paper cleans the inside of the machine as it feeds through the machine. Check the folded part of the ejected paper. If it is smudged with ink, perform Bottom Plate Cleaning again. If the problem is not resolved after performing cleaning again, the protrusions inside the machine may be stained. Clean them according to instructions.
Cleaning the Protrusions inside the Machine Page 864 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Maintenance > Cleaning Your Machine > Cleaning the Protrusions inside the Machine U063 Cleaning the Protrusions inside the Machine If protrusions inside the machine are stained, wipe off any ink from the protrusions using a cotton swab or the like. Important Be sure to turn off the power and disconnect the power plug before cleaning the machine.
Aligning the Print Head Manually Page 865 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Maintenance > Aligning the Print Head Manually Aligning the Print Head Manually Manual Print Head Alignment Page top
Manual Print Head Alignment Page 866 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Maintenance > Aligning the Print Head Manually > Manual Print Head Alignment U064 Manual Print Head Alignment This section describes how to align the Print Head manually. If the results of Automatic Print Head Alignment are not satisfactory, follow the procedure below to perform Manual Print Head Alignment to precisely align the Print Head. For details on performing Automatic Print Head Alignment, refer to Routine Maintenance .
Manual Print Head Alignment Page 867 of 1135 pages 9. Check the printed patterns, and use the button to input the number of the pattern in column A that has the least noticeable vertical streaks. Note If it is difficult to pick the best pattern, pick the setting that produces the least noticeable vertical white streaks. (A) Less noticeable vertical white streaks (B) More noticeable vertical white streaks 10.
Manual Print Head Alignment If it is difficult to pick the best pattern, pick the setting that produces the least noticeable horizontal white streaks. (C) Less noticeable horizontal white streaks (D) More noticeable horizontal white streaks 11. Confirm the displayed message and touch the OK button. The second pattern is printed. Important Do not open the Scanning Unit (Cover) while printing is in progress. 12.
Manual Print Head Alignment Page 869 of 1135 pages 13. Repeat the same procedure until you finish inputting the pattern number for columns I to Q, then touch the OK button. 14. Confirm the displayed message and touch the OK button. The third pattern is printed. Important Do not open the Scanning Unit (Cover) while printing is in progress. 15. Check the printed patterns, and use the button to input the number of the pattern in column a that has the least noticeable horizontal streaks.
Performing Maintenance from a Computer Page 870 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Maintenance > Performing Maintenance from a Computer Performing Maintenance from a Computer Cleaning the Print Heads Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers Aligning the Print Head Position Checking the Print Head Nozzles Cleaning Inside the Machine Page top
Cleaning the Print Heads Advanced Guide > Maintenance > Performing Maintenance from a Computer > Cleaning the Print Heads P026 Cleaning the Print Heads The print head cleaning function allows you to unclog clogged nozzles in the print head. Perform print head cleaning if printing is faint or a specific color fails to print, even though there is enough ink. The procedure for cleaning the print heads is as follows: Cleaning 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2.
Cleaning the Print Heads Page 872 of 1135 pages The Nozzle Check dialog box opens after the confirmation message. 5. Check the results To check whether the print quality has improved, click Print Check Pattern. To cancel the check process, click Cancel. Important Cleaning consumes a small amount of ink. Deep Cleaning consumes a larger amount of ink than Cleaning. Cleaning the print heads frequently will rapidly deplete your printer's ink supply. Consequently, perform cleaning only when necessary.
Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers Page 873 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Maintenance > Performing Maintenance from a Computer > Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers P027 Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers Cleans the paper feed roller. Perform feed roller cleaning when there are paper particles sticking to the paper feed roller and paper is not fed properly. The procedure for performing the feed roller cleaning is as follows: Roller Cleaning 1.
Aligning the Print Head Position Page 874 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Maintenance > Performing Maintenance from a Computer > Aligning the Print Head Position P028 Aligning the Print Head Position Print head alignment corrects the installation positions of the print head and improves deviated colors and lines. This machine supports two head alignment methods: automatic head alignment and manual head alignment. Normally, the machine is set for automatic head alignment.
Checking the Print Head Nozzles Page 875 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Maintenance > Performing Maintenance from a Computer > Checking the Print Head Nozzles P029 Checking the Print Head Nozzles The nozzle check function allows you to check whether the print heads are working properly by printing a nozzle check pattern. Print the pattern if printing becomes faint, or if a specific color fails to print. The procedure for printing a nozzle check pattern is as follows: Nozzle Check 1.
Cleaning Inside the Machine Page 876 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Maintenance > Performing Maintenance from a Computer > Cleaning Inside the Machine P030 Cleaning Inside the Machine Perform bottom plate cleaning before you execute duplex printing to prevent smudges on the back side of the paper. Also perform bottom plate cleaning if ink smudges caused by something other than print data appear on the printed page.
About Bluetooth Communication Page 877 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication About Bluetooth Communication Handling Precautions Preparation to Use the Bluetooth Unit Printing Data via Bluetooth Communication Basic Procedure for Printing via Bluetooth Communication Bluetooth Settings Troubleshooting Specifications Page top
Handling Precautions Page 878 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication > Handling Precautions Handling Precautions Shipping the Product Page top
Shipping the Product Page 879 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication > Handling Precautions > Shipping the Product B003 Shipping the Product This product may not be used in countries or regions other than the country or region where it was purchased due to local laws and regulations. Please note that the use of this product in such countries or regions may lead to penalties and that Canon should not be liable for such punishment.
Preparation to Use the Bluetooth Unit Page 880 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication > Preparation to Use the Bluetooth Unit Preparation to Use the Bluetooth Unit Bluetooth Unit Attaching to and Removing from the Printer Page top
Bluetooth Unit Page 881 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication > Preparation to Use the Bluetooth Unit > Bluetooth Unit B004 Bluetooth Unit The Bluetooth Unit BU-30 (hereafter referred to as the Bluetooth unit) is an adaptor which can be used with a Canon IJ printer with Bluetooth interface. By attaching the Bluetooth unit to a Canon IJ printer with Bluetooth interface, wireless printing from a Bluetooth enabled device, such as a computer or mobile phone, is possible.
Attaching to and Removing from the Printer Page 882 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication > Preparation to Use the Bluetooth Unit > Attaching to and Removing from the Printer B005 Attaching to and Removing from the Printer Attaching the Bluetooth Unit to the Printer Removing the Bluetooth Unit from the Printer Attaching the Bluetooth Unit to the Printer Attach the Bluetooth unit to the Direct Print Port (A) of the printer in accordance with the following procedure.
Attaching to and Removing from the Printer Page 883 of 1135 pages Note When the Bluetooth unit is properly attached to the printer, the message is displayed on the LCD. Removing the Bluetooth Unit from the Printer Remove the Bluetooth unit from the Direct Print Port of the printer in accordance with the following procedure. 1. Remove the Bluetooth unit from the Direct Print Port of the printer.
Printing Data via Bluetooth Communication Page 884 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication > Printing Data via Bluetooth Communication Printing Data via Bluetooth Communication Preparation Installing the MP Drivers Setting the Printer Registering the Printer Deleting the Printer Page top
Preparation Page 885 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication > Printing Data via Bluetooth Communication > Preparation B006 Preparation In order to print via Bluetooth communication with Windows, the following system requirements must be satisfied. Computer A computer in which an internal Bluetooth module is installed or a computer to which an optional Bluetooth adapter (available from various manufacturers) is attached.
Preparation Page 886 of 1135 pages Authenticate the printer as a Bluetooth device on Bluetooth Devices in Hardware and Sound under Control Panel. See Registering the Printer . When using Windows XP SP2 or later, and when Bluetooth Devices is displayed in Printers and Other Hardware under Control Panel Authenticate the printer as a Bluetooth device on Bluetooth Devices in Printers and Other Hardware under Control Panel. See Registering the Printer .
Installing the MP Drivers Page 887 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication > Printing Data via Bluetooth Communication > Installing the MP Drivers B007 Installing the MP Drivers Note If you use the printer connecting with a computer, the MP Drivers have already been installed. In this case, move to the next step.
Setting the Printer Page 888 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication > Printing Data via Bluetooth Communication > Setting the Printer B008 Setting the Printer This section describes the procedures for checking the settings of the Bluetooth unit on the LCD of the printer in preparation for Bluetooth printing. If you need more information about the Bluetooth settings, see Setting Bluetooth Printing . 1. Make sure that the Bluetooth unit is attached and the printer is turned on.
Setting the Printer Page 889 of 1135 pages If multiple printer units with the same model name are connected to the system, assigning a different device name to each printer is recommended for easy identification of the printer you will use. See Bluetooth settings Screen . After checking the device name, use the OK button on the printer to finish setting. After checking the Bluetooth settings using the LCD, register the printer on your computer.
Registering the Printer Page 890 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication > Printing Data via Bluetooth Communication > Registering the Printer B009 Registering the Printer Register the printer as a Bluetooth device using Add a Bluetooth Device (Bluetooth Devices except for Windows 7) under Control Panel. Note Before registering the printer on Add a Bluetooth Device (Bluetooth Devices except for Windows 7) under Control Panel, enable the Bluetooth function of your computer.
Registering the Printer If the device name is not displayed, see register displayed in the printer list? . 4. Page 891 of 1135 pages Check 3: Is the printer name which you want to Select Pair without using a code. When registering this printer, Connecting with this device (Pairing with this wireless device in Windows Vista) is displayed. Note If you set a passkey on the printer, select Enter the device's pairing code and input the passkey, then click Next.
Registering the Printer Note In Windows Vista, the Windows needs to install driver software for your Bluetooth Peripheral Device screen may be displayed automatically. In this case, click Don't show this message again for this device. In Windows XP: 1. Log into a user account with the administrator privilege. 2. Click Control Panel, Printers and Other Hardware, then Bluetooth Devices. 3. Click Add on the Devices sheet. Add Bluetooth Device Wizard will start. 4.
Registering the Printer Page 893 of 1135 pages Select the same device name as that checked under Setting the Printer . Note If the device name is not displayed, see register displayed in the printer list? . 6. Check 3: Is the printer name which you want to Select Don't use a passkey, and then Next. Note If you set a passkey on the printer, select Use the passkey found in the documentation and input the passkey then click Next. For more information about a passkey, see Bluetooth settings Screen . 7.
Registering the Printer 8. Page 894 of 1135 pages Check that the device name selected at step 5 is registered on the Devices sheet, and click OK. Now, the settings for printing via Bluetooth communication are ready.
Deleting the Printer Page 895 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication > Printing Data via Bluetooth Communication > Deleting the Printer B010 Deleting the Printer This section describes the procedure to delete the registered printer. If you want to re-register the printer as a Bluetooth device, first follow the procedure below to delete the printer, and then re-register it. For the procedure to re-register the printer, see Registering the Printer .
Basic Procedure for Printing via Bluetooth Communication Page 896 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication > Basic Procedure for Printing via Bluetooth Communication Basic Procedure for Printing via Bluetooth Communication Printing with Computers Printing with Bluetooth Compliant Devices other than a Computer Page top
Printing with Computers Page 897 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication > Basic Procedure for Printing via Bluetooth Communication with Computers > Printing B011 Printing with Computers When using Bluetooth communication, also refer to the computer's instruction manual. When printing from a Bluetooth compliant device other than a computer, see Compliant Devices other than a Computer . Printing with Bluetooth Note Depending on your application software, operations may differ.
Printing with Computers 1. Select the print setting in Commonly Used Settings. 2. Confirm the required print settings in Media Type, Printer Paper Size, and so on. Note You can specify the advanced print settings on Main sheet and Page Setup sheet. For details on the print settings, refer to Various Printing Methods . 3. Click OK. The Print dialog box is displayed. 5. Click Print (or OK) to print the document. Printing begins.
Printing with Computers Page 899 of 1135 pages When you use a USB cable for printing, select Canon XXX Printer from Select Printer. To cancel a print job in progress, use the Stop button on the printer or click Cancel Printing on the printer status monitor. After printing is canceled, a sheet of paper may be ejected with no printing results. To display the printer status monitor, click Canon XXX Printer (Copy X) on the taskbar. "X" is a device name or a digit.
Printing with Bluetooth Compliant Devices other than a Computer Page 900 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication > Basic Procedure for Printing via Bluetooth Communication with Bluetooth Compliant Devices other than a Computer > Printing B012 Printing with Bluetooth Compliant Devices other than a Computer The LCD of the printer allows you to perform settings for printing using Bluetooth compliant devices other than a computer.
Bluetooth Settings Page 901 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication > Bluetooth Settings Bluetooth Settings Setting Bluetooth Printing Bluetooth settings Screen Page top
Setting Bluetooth Printing Page 902 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication > Bluetooth Settings > Setting Bluetooth Printing B013 Setting Bluetooth Printing 1. Make sure that the printer is turned on, and attach the Bluetooth unit. Note When the Bluetooth unit is properly attached to the printer, the message is displayed on the LCD. 2. Display the Bluetooth settings screen on the LCD.
Bluetooth settings Screen Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication > Bluetooth Settings > Bluetooth settings Screen B014 Bluetooth settings Screen 1. Select device name Displays the device name of the printer to which the Bluetooth unit is attached. Select device name Screen 2. Access refusal setting Selecting ON will disable searching of this printer by a Bluetooth-compatible device. Access refusal setting Screen 3.
Bluetooth settings Screen Access refusal setting Screen When you search from a Bluetooth device, you can enable or disable the display of the printer name. ON Disables searching from a Bluetooth device. OFF (Default setting) Enables searching and printing from a Bluetooth device. Security settings Screen Enable Selecting Enable allows you to choose either of the security modes below. Mode 3(recommended) This mode is activated on link level enforced security.
Bluetooth settings Screen Page 905 of 1135 pages Page top
Troubleshooting Page 906 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication > Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Printer Cannot be Registered Printing Does Not Start Page top
Troubleshooting Page 907 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication > Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting B015 Troubleshooting This section describes how to solve the problems occurred during the use of the Bluetooth unit. Problems related to the printer's hardware, MP Drivers installation, and so on, are also described in Troubleshooting.
Printer Cannot be Registered Page 908 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication > Troubleshooting > Printer Cannot be Registered B016 Printer Cannot be Registered Check 1: Have MP Drivers been installed? Setup CD-ROM into the computer's disc drive, then If MP Drivers are not yet installed, insert the perform Custom Install and select MP Drivers. Check 2: Is unsupported Bluetooth driver used? Confirm that the Bluetooth driver installed on your computer is supported.
Printer Cannot be Registered Page 909 of 1135 pages Check whether access from a Bluetooth-compatible device is refused. Check the printer access setting displaying the Bluetooth settings screen on the LCD of the printer. 1. Display the Bluetooth settings screen on the LCD of the printer. For information about how to display the Bluetooth settings screen, refer to Machine Settings on the LCD . 2. Select Access refusal setting. 3.
Printing Does Not Start Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication > Troubleshooting > Printing Does Not Start B017 Printing Does Not Start Check 1: Is Bluetooth unit ready for use? Make sure that the Bluetooth settings screen can be displayed on the LCD of the printer. If the screen cannot be displayed, Bluetooth communication is disabled. Remove the Bluetooth unit from the printer and attach it once again.
Printing Does Not Start Page 911 of 1135 pages When authenticating the printer as a Bluetooth device using Bluetooth Settings built in the computer TBPnnn (Canon XXX Printer (Copy X)) ("n" is a digit) For Windows Vista or Windows XP When authenticating the printer as a Bluetooth device in Control Panel BTHnnn (Canon XXX Printer (Copy X)) ("n" is a digit).
Printing Does Not Start Page 912 of 1135 pages Check 5: Were the MP Drivers installed after printer registration on Add a Bluetooth Device (Bluetooth Devices in Windows Vista or Windows XP)? If you have installed the MP Drivers after registering the printer as a Bluetooth device on Add a Bluetooth Device (Bluetooth Devices in Windows Vista or Windows XP), delete the printer and then register it again. For more information about the procedure, see Preparation .
Specifications Page 913 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication > Specifications B019 Specifications Communication Bluetooth v2.0 method Maximum Speed 1.44 Mbps Output Bluetooth Power Class 2 Communication distance Line-of-sight distance: approx. 33 ft.
Changing the Machine Settings Page 914 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings Changing the Machine Settings Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer Page top
Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD Page 915 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD Plain paper feed settings Print settings LAN settings Device user settings Mobile phone print settings Bluetooth settings PictBridge print settings Language selection Reset setting Page top
Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD Page 916 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD Settings on the LCD > Changing the Machine U066 Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD This section describes the procedure to change the settings in the Device settings screen, taking the steps to specify Extended copy amount as an example. 1. Make sure that the machine is turned on. 2. Select Setup on the HOME screen.
Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD Page 917 of 1135 pages Plain paper feed settings Print settings LAN settings Device user settings Mobile phone print settings Bluetooth settings PictBridge print settings Language selection Reset setting Page top
Plain paper feed settings Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD settings Page 918 of 1135 pages > Plain paper feed U083 Plain paper feed settings Specifies the paper source for A4, Letter, A5, and B5 plain paper. Note A4, Letter, A5, and B5 paper can be loaded in the Cassette. Load the other sizes of paper on the Rear Tray.
Print settings Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD Page 919 of 1135 pages > Print settings U075 Print settings Prevent paper abrasion Use this setting only if the print surface becomes smudged. Important Be sure to set this back to OFF after printing since it may result in lower printing speed or lower print quality. Extended copy amount Selects the amount of image that extends off the paper when printing in borderless (full).
LAN settings Page 920 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD > LAN settings U076 LAN settings Change wireless/wired Activates either wireless LAN or wired LAN. You can also deactivate wireless/wired LAN. Note When you change the connection method (wired or wireless), set up the machine according to the method you will use. For details, refer to your setup manual. Wireless LAN setup Selects the setting method for wireless LAN connection.
LAN settings Page 921 of 1135 pages Subnet prefix length - XXX Default gateway XXX. XXX. XXX.
LAN settings Page 922 of 1135 pages Set memory card sharing Selects whether to share the Card Slot with a LAN connected computer. Note You cannot change this setting with the memory card inserted in the Card Slot. WSD setting Activates/deactivates the WSD (one of the network protocols supported in Windows 7 and Windows Vista) setting or specifies the timeout length. Note When this setting is activated, the printer icon is displayed on the Network Explorer in Windows 7 and Windows Vista.
Device user settings Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD Page 923 of 1135 pages > Device user settings U077 Device user settings Date display format Changes the display format of shooting dates when printed. Note When ON is selected for Print date on the print settings screen in printing from a memory card or a USB flash drive, the shooting date is printed in the date display format you selected. For print settings, see Setting Items .
Device user settings Page 924 of 1135 pages Copying Printing from a memory card/USB flash drive Printing from a printed photo or a film Printing from a PictBridge compliant device Printing from a mobile phone Printing a template form Important Operating speed may be reduced compared to when this setting is set to OFF. This function may not be so effective depending on the machine's setting. Furthermore, certain noise, such as when the machine is preparing for printing, is not reduced.
Mobile phone print settings Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD settings Page 925 of 1135 pages > Mobile phone print U078 Mobile phone print settings When printing from a mobile phone through infrared communication or Bluetooth communication, select the print settings such as page size, media type, layout, and so on.
Bluetooth settings Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD Page 926 of 1135 pages > Bluetooth settings U079 Bluetooth settings You can change the device name of the machine, passkey, and so on in the Bluetooth settings. For details on how to print from a mobile phone through Bluetooth communication, see Printing from Mobile Phone via Bluetooth Communication .
PictBridge print settings Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD settings Page 927 of 1135 pages > PictBridge print U080 PictBridge print settings You can change the print settings when printing from a PictBridge compliant device. Set the print settings to Default on the PictBridge compliant device when you want to print according to the settings on the machine.
PictBridge print settings applied. If the print result with Auto photo fix selected for Photo fix is not satisfactory, select Manual correction, then specify each advanced setting item. Manual correction Screen If No correction is selected, photos are printed without correction. 6. Red-EyeCorrection Select ON to correct red eyes in portraits caused by flash photography. Depending on the type of the photo, red eyes may not be corrected or parts other than the eyes may be corrected.
PictBridge print settings 7. Page 929 of 1135 pages Contrast Adjust contrast. 8. Color balance Adjust color hue. For example, you can increase red or yellow to adjust the skin tone. 9. Effect Applies special effects to the photo, such as printing in sepia tones or with a sketch illustration like effect.
Language selection Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD Page 930 of 1135 pages > Language selection U081 Language selection Changes the language for LCD messages and menus.
Reset setting Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD Page 931 of 1135 pages > Reset setting U082 Reset setting You can change the settings back to the default. Note You cannot change the following setting items back to the default: The language displayed on the LCD The current position of the Print Head The Read/write attribute setting LAN settings* * You can change LAN settings back to the default from Reset LAN settings under LAN settings.
Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer Page 932 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer Changing the Print Options Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile Setting the Paper Source for Plain Paper Managing the Machine Power Reducing the Machine Noise Changing the Machine Operation Mode Page top
Changing the Print Options Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer Page 933 of 1135 pages > Changing the Print Options P413 Changing the Print Options You change the detailed print driver settings for print data that is sent from an application software. Check this check box if part of the image data is cut off, the paper source during printing differs from the driver settings, or printing fails.
Changing the Print Options Page 934 of 1135 pages Page top
Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer Frequently Used Printing Profile Page 935 of 1135 pages > Registering a P417 Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile You can register the frequently used printing profile to Commonly Used Settings on the Quick Setup tab. Unnecessary printing profiles can be deleted at any time.
Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile Page 936 of 1135 pages 4. Save the settings Enter a name in the Name field, and if necessary, set the items in Options.... Then click OK. The printing profile is saved, and the Quick Setup tab is displayed again. The name and icon are added to the Commonly Used Settings list. Important To save the page size, orientation, and number of copies that was set in each sheet, click Options..., and check each item.
Setting the Paper Source for Plain Paper Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer Source for Plain Paper Page 937 of 1135 pages > Setting the Paper P032 Setting the Paper Source for Plain Paper When you select Automatically Select from Paper Source, you can use the printer driver to select the paper source for plain paper. The procedure for setting the paper source is as follows: Paper Source Setting for Plain Paper 1.
Managing the Machine Power Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer Machine Power Page 938 of 1135 pages > Managing the P414 Managing the Machine Power This function allows you to manage the machine power from the printer driver. The procedure for managing the printer power is as follows: Power Off The Power Off function turns off the machine. When you use this function, you will not be able to turn the machine on from the printer driver. 1.
Reducing the Machine Noise Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer Page 939 of 1135 pages > Reducing the Machine Noise P034 Reducing the Machine Noise This function allows you to reduce the operating noise. Select when you wish to reduce the operating noise of the printer at night, etc. Using this function may lower the print speed. The procedure for using the quiet mode is as follows: Quiet Mode 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2.
Changing the Machine Operation Mode Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer Machine Operation Mode Page 940 of 1135 pages > Changing the P035 Changing the Machine Operation Mode If necessary, switch between various modes of machine operation. The procedure for configuring Custom Settings is as follows: Custom Settings 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2.
Troubleshooting Page 941 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Troubleshooting If an Error Occurs The Machine Cannot Be Powered On An Error Message Is Displayed on the LCD LCD Cannot Be Seen At All An Unintended Language Is Displayed on the LCD Cannot Install the MP Drivers Cannot Install the Application Program Cannot Connect to Computer with a USB Cable Properly Print Results Not Satisfactory Printing Does Not Start Copying/Printing Stops Before It Is Completed Machine Move
Troubleshooting Page 942 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting U301 Troubleshooting This section describes troubleshooting tips for problems you may encounter when using the machine. For troubleshooting tips related to the setup, refer to the Network Setup Troubleshooting .
If an Error Occurs Page 943 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > If an Error Occurs U302 If an Error Occurs When an error occurs in printing such as the machine is out of paper or paper is jammed, a troubleshooting message is displayed automatically. Take the appropriate action described in the message. The message may vary depending on the version of your operating system.
The Machine Cannot Be Powered On Page 944 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > The Machine Cannot Be Powered On U303 The Machine Cannot Be Powered On Check 1: Press the ON button. Check 2: Make sure that the power plug is securely plugged into the Power Cord Connector of the machine, then turn it back on. Check 3: Unplug the machine from the power supply, then plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on after leaving it for at least 3 minutes.
An Error Message Is Displayed on the LCD Page 945 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > An Error Message Is Displayed on the LCD U304 An Error Message Is Displayed on the LCD If an error message is displayed on the LCD, take the corresponding action described below. Action Message The ink may have run out. Replacing the ink tank is recommended. U041 If the lamp on the ink tank is flashing, ink may have run out. Replacing the ink tank is recommended.
An Error Message Is Displayed on the LCD Page 946 of 1135 pages displayed on the LCD when checking the current ink level. Routine Maintenance The following ink tank cannot be recognized. U043 U140 U150 Appropriate ink tank is not installed. Install the appropriate ink tank. U141 The ink tank is not installed. Install the ink tank. Routine Maintenance The ink tank is not compatible with this machine. (The lamp on the ink tank is off.) Install an appropriate ink tank.
An Error Message Is Displayed on the LCD Cannot print the specified PDF file. The format is not supported or the file is too large. Page 947 of 1135 pages Make sure the PDF file is printable from a memory card or USB flash drive. See Printing Documents (PDF File) Saved on a Memory Card/USB Flash Drive for more information. Note The names of the PDF files are displayed even though they cannot be printed from the memory card or USB flash drive. It is recommended you confirm whether they are printable.
An Error Message Is Displayed on the LCD Page 948 of 1135 pages status of the Print Head. Routine Maintenance Paper of size other than A4 or Letter is loaded in the Rear Tray. Touch the OK button on the machine to dismiss the error, then load a sheet of A4/ Letter-sized Canon Matte Photo Paper MP-101 with the printing side (whiter side) facing UP in the Rear Tray. For Automatic Print Head Alignment, always load paper in the Rear Tray. The Paper Output Slot is exposed to strong light.
An Error Message Is Displayed on the LCD Page 949 of 1135 pages error occurs, contact the service center. Release the scanner lock switch and turn off power then back on again. The Scanner Lock Switch is not released. Slide the Scanner Lock Switch to the release position ( ) and press the ON button to turn the machine off. Then, turn the power back on. If this error still remains, contact the service center. The card is currently writable from PC. Set to [Not writable from PC].
LCD Cannot Be Seen At All Page 950 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > LCD Cannot Be Seen At All U306 LCD Cannot Be Seen At All If the POWER lamp is off: The machine is not powered on. Connect the power cord and press the ON button. If the POWER lamp is lit: The LCD may be in the screen-saver mode. On the Operation Panel, touch a button other than the ON button.
An Unintended Language Is Displayed on the LCD Page 951 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > An Unintended Language Is Displayed on the LCD U307 An Unintended Language Is Displayed on the LCD Select the language you want to be displayed according to the following procedure. 1. Touch the HOME button and wait for about 5 seconds. 2. Select Setup on the HOME screen. Note For details on how to select a menu on the HOME screen, refer to 3. Select Overview of the Machine .
Cannot Install the MP Drivers Page 952 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Cannot Install the MP Drivers U308 Cannot Install the MP Drivers Important If you cannot install the MP Drivers when you use the machine over LAN, refer to the setup manual. If the installation does not start even after the Setup CD-ROM is inserted into your computer's disc drive: Start the installation following the procedure below. 1. Click Start then Computer. In Windows XP, click Start then My Computer. 2.
Cannot Install the MP Drivers Page 953 of 1135 pages If you are unable to proceed beyond the Printer Connection screen, make sure that the USB cable is securely plugged into the USB port of the machine and is connected to the computer, and then follow the procedure below to reinstall the MP Drivers. Note The printer is not detected. Check the connection. may be displayed depending on the computer you use. In this case, follow the procedure below to reinstall the MP Drivers. 1. Click Cancel. 2.
Cannot Install the Application Program Page 954 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Cannot Install the Application Program U347 Cannot Install the Application Program Easy-PhotoPrint Pro Does Not Start up or Easy-PhotoPrint Pro Menu Does Not Appear If the Easy-PhotoPrint Pro menu does not appear on Adobe Photoshop although you have installed Easy-PhotoPrint Pro, make sure that Adobe Photoshop is not running and install Adobe Photoshop Plug-In as described below. 1.
Cannot Connect to Computer with a USB Cable Properly Page 955 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Cannot Connect to Computer with a USB Cable Properly U309 Cannot Connect to Computer with a USB Cable Properly Printing or Scanning Speed Is Slow/Hi-Speed USB Connection Does Not Work/"This device can perform faster" Message Is Displayed If your system environment is not fully compatible with Hi-Speed USB, the machine will operate at a lower speed provided under USB 1.1.
Print Results Not Satisfactory Page 956 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Print Results Not Satisfactory U310 Print Results Not Satisfactory If the print result is not satisfactory due to white streaks, misaligned lines, or uneven colors, confirm the paper and print quality settings first. Check 1: Do the page size and media type settings match the size and type of the loaded paper? When these settings are incorrect, you cannot obtain a proper print result.
Print Results Not Satisfactory Page 957 of 1135 pages Check 3: If the problem is not resolved, there may be other causes.
Cannot Print to End of Job Page 958 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Print Results Not Satisfactory > Cannot Print to End of Job U311 Cannot Print to End of Job Check 1: Is the size of the print data extremely large? Click Print Options on the Page Setup sheet. Then, select the Prevent loss of print data check box in the displayed dialog. Check 2: Is the space of your computer's hard disk sufficient? Delete unnecessary files to free disk space.
Part of the Page Is Not Printed Page 959 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Print Results Not Satisfactory > Part of the Page Is Not Printed U312 Part of the Page Is Not Printed Check: When performing automatic duplex printing, the reason below is possible. When performing automatic duplex printing, the printable area at the top of the page will be 0.08 inches / 2 mm narrower than the usual. For this reason, the bottom of the page may not be printed.
No Printing Results/Printing Is Blurred/Colors Are Wrong/White Streaks Page 960 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Print Results Not Satisfactory > No Printing Results/Printing Is Blurred/Colors Are Wrong/White Streaks U313 No Printing Results/Printing Is Blurred/Colors Are Wrong/White Streaks No Printing Results Printing Is Blurred Colors Are Wrong White Streaks
No Printing Results/Printing Is Blurred/Colors Are Wrong/White Streaks Check 1: Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings? Print Results Not Satisfactory Check 2: Check the status of ink tanks. Replace the ink tank if the ink has run out. Routine Maintenance Check 3: Is the orange tape or protective film remaining? Make sure that all of the protective film is peeled off and the L-shape air hole is exposed, as illustrated in (A).
No Printing Results/Printing Is Blurred/Colors Are Wrong/White Streaks Page 962 of 1135 pages the paper is loaded with the printable side facing up. Printing on the wrong side of such paper may cause unclear prints or prints with reduced quality. Refer to the instruction manual supplied with the paper for detailed information on the printable side. Check 6: Is the Platen Glass dirty? Clean the Platen Glass.
Lines Are Misaligned Page 963 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Print Results Not Satisfactory > Lines Are Misaligned U315 Lines Are Misaligned Check 1: Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings? Print Results Not Satisfactory Check 2: Perform Print Head Alignment. If the Print Head is misaligned in installing it, straight lines may be printed misaligned. Be sure to align the Print Head after you install it.
Line or Image Does Not Print or Prints Partially Page 964 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Print Results Not Satisfactory > Line or Image Does Not Print or Prints Partially U152 Line or Image Does Not Print or Prints Partially Check 1: Is the size of the print data extremely large? Click Print Options on the Page Setup sheet. Then, select the Prevent loss of print data check box in the displayed dialog.
Printed Paper Curls or Has Ink Blots Page 965 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Print Results Not Satisfactory > Printed Paper Curls or Has Ink Blots U316 Printed Paper Curls or Has Ink Blots Printed Paper Has Ink Blots Printed Paper Curls Check 1: Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings? Print Results Not Satisfactory Check 2: If the intensity is set high, reduce the Intensity setting in the printer driver and try printing again.
Paper Is Smudged/Printed Surface Is Scratched Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Print Results Not Satisfactory > Paper Is Smudged/Printed Surface Is Scratched U317 Paper Is Smudged/Printed Surface Is Scratched Paper Is Smudged The Edges of Paper Are Smudged Printed Surface Is Smudged Printed Surface Is Scratched Check 1: Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings? Print Results Not Satisfactory Check 2: Is the appropriate type of paper used? Check the followings: Check to see if the paper
Paper Is Smudged/Printed Surface Is Scratched Page 967 of 1135 pages 1. Roll up the paper in the opposite direction to the paper curl as shown below. 2. Check that the paper is now flat. We recommend printing curl-corrected paper one sheet at a time. Note Depending on the media type, the paper may be smudged or may not be fed properly even if it is not curled inward. In such cases, follow the procedure described below to curl the paper outward within 0.1 inch / 3 mm (B) in height before printing.
Paper Is Smudged/Printed Surface Is Scratched Page 968 of 1135 pages 1. Open the printer driver setup window. Opening the Printer Driver Setup Window Click Here: Printer Driver * Before clicking here to open the printer driver setup window, quit the running application software. 2. On the Main sheet, select Manual for Color/Intensity, and then click Set. 3. Drag the Intensity slide bar on the Color Adjustment sheet to adjust the intensity.
Paper Is Smudged/Printed Surface Is Scratched Page 969 of 1135 pages 4. Drag the Ink Drying Wait Time slide bar to set the wait time, and then click Send. 5. Confirm the message and click OK. Check 11: Is the paper scratched by other loaded paper? Depending on the media type, the paper may be scratched by other loaded paper when feeding from the Rear Tray. In this case, load one sheet at a time.
Back of the Paper Is Smudged Page 970 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Print Results Not Satisfactory > Back of the Paper Is Smudged U318 Back of the Paper Is Smudged Check 1: Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings? Print Results Not Satisfactory Check 2: Perform the Bottom Plate Cleaning to clean the inside of the machine.
Vertical Lines Are Printed on the Sides of the Printout Page 971 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Print Results Not Satisfactory > Vertical Lines Are Printed on the Sides of the Printout U319 Vertical Lines Are Printed on the Sides of the Printout Check 1: Did you confirm the paper type and print quality settings? Print Results Not Satisfactory Check 2: Is the size of the loaded paper correct? The vertical lines may be printed in the margin if the size of the loaded paper is larger tha
Colors Are Uneven or Streaked Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Print Results Not Satisfactory > Colors Are Uneven or Streaked U320 Colors Are Uneven or Streaked Colors Are Uneven Colors Are Streaked Check 1: Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings? Print Results Not Satisfactory Check 2: Print the Nozzle Check Pattern and perform any necessary maintenance operations such as Print Head Cleaning.
Colors Are Uneven or Streaked Page 973 of 1135 pages If Print Head Deep Cleaning does not resolve the problem, the Print Head may be damaged. Contact the service center. Check 3: Perform Print Head Alignment. Routine Maintenance Note If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Alignment, perform Print Head Alignment manually referring to Manual Print Head Alignment .
Printing Does Not Start Page 974 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Printing Does Not Start U321 Printing Does Not Start Check 1: Make sure that the power plug is securely plugged in, then turn the machine on. While the POWER lamp is flashing blue, the machine is initializing. Wait until the stops flashing and remains lit blue. POWER lamp Note When printing large data such as a photo or graphics, it may take longer to start printing.
Printing Does Not Start driver correct? When using Fine Art Paper "Photo Rag" or non Canon genuine specialty paper, be sure to select the type of each media from Media Type and either Fine Art A4 or Fine Art Letter from Page Size or Paper size. Confirm the settings following the procedure below, and try printing again. 1. Make sure that either Fine Art A4 or Fine Art Letter is selected in the application.
Printing Does Not Start Page 976 of 1135 pages Printing does not start even though the port named "CNBJNP_xxxxxxxxxx" is selected when the machine is used over LAN: Launch the Canon IJ Network Tool, and select "CNBJNPxxxxxxxxxx" as you confirmed in step 4, then associate the port with the printer using Associate Port in the Settings menu. If the problem is not resolved, reinstall the MP Drivers. Check 11: Is the size of the print data extremely large? Click Print Options on the Page Setup sheet.
Copying/Printing Stops Before It Is Completed Page 977 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Copying/Printing Stops Before It Is Completed U322 Copying/Printing Stops Before It Is Completed Check 1: Is the Inner Cover opened while printing on paper? Close the Inner Cover, then touch the OK button on the machine. A page of print data being sent at the time of the error will be erased, so print that page again.
Machine Moves But Ink Is Not Ejected Page 978 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Machine Moves But Ink Is Not Ejected U323 Machine Moves But Ink Is Not Ejected Check 1: Are the Print Head nozzles clogged? Print the Nozzle Check Pattern to determine whether the ink ejects properly from the print head nozzles. Refer to Routine Maintenance for the Nozzle Check Pattern printing, Print Head Cleaning, and Print Head Deep Cleaning.
Printing Speed Is Not as Fast as Expected Page 979 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Printing Speed Is Not as Fast as Expected U324 Printing Speed Is Not as Fast as Expected Check 1: Is printing performed in Quiet Mode? Print speed is reduced if you specified to print in Quiet Mode on the computer or Operation Panel. For faster printing, do not print in Quiet Mode. For information to make settings on the computer, refer to For information to make setting on the Operation Panel, see LCD .
Print Head Holder Does Not Move to the Position for Replacing Page 980 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Print Head Holder Does Not Move to the Position for Replacing U325 Print Head Holder Does Not Move to the Position for Replacing Check 1: Is the POWER lamp off? Check if the POWER lamp is lit blue. The Print Head Holder will not move unless the power is on. If the Scanning Unit (Cover) and turn the machine on.
Paper Does Not Feed Properly Page 981 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Paper Does Not Feed Properly U326 Paper Does Not Feed Properly Check 1: Make sure of the following when you load paper. When loading two or more sheets of paper, flip through the paper before loading. When loading two or more sheets of paper, align the edges of the sheets before loading. When loading two or more sheets of paper, make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the paper load limit.
Paper Does Not Feed Properly Page 982 of 1135 pages Check 5: Remove the foreign object in the Cassette. Check 6: Make sure that there are not any foreign objects in the Rear Tray. If the paper tears in the Rear Tray, see Paper Jams to remove it. If there are any foreign objects in the Rear Tray, be sure to turn off the machine, unplug it from the power supply, then remove the foreign object. Check 7: Make sure that the Inner Cover is closed completely.
Paper Does Not Feed Properly For information on cleaning the inside of the Cassette, refer to Page 983 of 1135 pages Routine Maintenance . Check 10: Is the Rear Cover closed completely? Paper may be jammed if the Rear Cover is not closed completely. Push the Rear Cover until it is closed completely. Refer to Overview of the Machine for the position of the Rear Cover.
Paper Does Not Feed from the Paper Source Specified in the Printer Dr...
Paper Jams Page 985 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Paper Jams U328 Paper Jams Note If you need to turn off the machine to remove jammed paper during printing, touch the cancel print jobs before turning off the machine.
Paper Is Jammed in the Paper Output Slot or the Rear Tray Page 986 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Paper Jams > Paper Is Jammed in the Paper Output Slot or the Rear Tray U349 Paper Is Jammed in the Paper Output Slot or the Rear Tray Remove the paper following the procedure below. 1. Slowly pull the paper out, either from the Rear Tray or from the Paper Output Slot, whichever is easier.
Paper Is Jammed inside the Machine at the Transport Unit Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Paper Jams > Paper Is Jammed inside the Machine at the Transport Unit U350 Paper Is Jammed inside the Machine at the Transport Unit Remove the paper following the procedure below. 1. Detach the Rear Cover. 2. Pull the paper out slowly. Note Be careful not to touch the components inside the machine. If you cannot pull the paper out, turn the machine off and turn it back on.
Paper Is Jammed inside the Machine at the Transport Unit Page 988 of 1135 pages 6. If any paper is sticking out of the Cassette, remove the paper, align and reload the paper in the Cassette. If you did not remove the jammed paper out in step 1 to 5 when automatic duplex printing, check the duplex transport section.
Jammed Paper Is Not Removed out When Automatic Duplex Printing Page 989 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Paper Jams > Jammed Paper Is Not Removed out When Automatic Duplex Printing U351 Jammed Paper Is Not Removed out When Automatic Duplex Printing Before removing the jammed paper, see Paper Is Jammed inside the Machine at the Transport Unit remove it from Transport Unit. If the paper jam error continues, remove the jammed paper following the procedure below. 1.
Jammed Paper Is Not Removed out When Automatic Duplex Printing Page 990 of 1135 pages after removing the paper, contact the service center.
In Other Cases Page 991 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Paper Jams > In Other Cases U353 In Other Cases Make sure of the following: Check 1: Are there any foreign objects around the Paper Output Slot? Check 2: Are there any foreign objects in the Rear Tray? If there are any foreign objects in the Rear Tray, be sure to turn off the machine, unplug it from the power supply, then remove the foreign object.
Message Appears on the Computer Screen Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Message Appears on the Computer Screen U331 Message Appears on the Computer Screen Error Number: B200 A printer error has occurred. Turn the printer off and unplug the power cord of the printer from the power supply. Then contact the service center. Is Displayed Error Number: **** A printer error has occurred. Turn the printer off and then on again. If this doesn't clear the error, see the user's guide for more detail.
Message Appears on the Computer Screen Page 993 of 1135 pages Error Regarding Automatic Print Head Alignment Is Displayed Check: See Auto head align has failed. in An Error Message Is Displayed on the LCD and take the appropriate action. Error Regarding the Power Cord Being Unplugged Is Displayed The power cord may have been unplugged while the machine was still on. Check the error message that appears on the computer, then click OK. The machine starts printing.
Message Appears on the Computer Screen Check 3: Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer properly. When the machine is connected to your computer with a USB cable, make sure that the USB cable is securely plugged in to the machine and the computer, then check the followings: If you are using a relay device such as a USB hub, disconnect it, connect the machine directly to the computer, and try printing again. If printing starts normally, there is a problem with the relay device.
Message Appears on the Computer Screen If you agree to participate in the survey program: Click Agree, then follow the on-screen instructions. The printer usage information will be sent via the Internet. If you have followed the on-screen instructions, the information will be sent automatically from the second time onward and the confirmation screen will not be displayed again. Note When the information is being sent, a caution screen such as an Internet security screen may be displayed.
Message Appears on the Computer Screen Page 996 of 1135 pages 3. Select Change. If you select Yes after you have followed the on-screen instructions, the confirmation screen will be displayed at the time of the next survey. If you select No, the information will be sent automatically. Note If you select Uninstall (or Remove), the Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program is uninstalled. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Cannot Print Properly with Automatic Duplex Printing Page 997 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Cannot Print Properly with Automatic Duplex Printing U332 Cannot Print Properly with Automatic Duplex Printing Check: Is the paper size or media type appropriate? Make sure that the actual size of the paper is suitable for automatic duplex printing. The sizes of media suitable for automatic duplex printing are A4, Letter, A5, and B5.
For Windows Users Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > For Windows Users U333 For Windows Users Printer Status Monitor Is Not Displayed Check: Is the printer status monitor enabled? Make sure that Enable Status Monitor is selected on the Option menu of the printer status monitor. 1. Open the printer driver setup window. Opening the Printer Driver Setup Window 2. On the Maintenance sheet, click View Printer Status. 3. Select Enable Status Monitor on the Option menu if it is not selected.
For Windows Users 2. Page 999 of 1135 pages Select the Start menu > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Scanners and Cameras. 3. Select WIA Canon XXX ser (where "XXX" is your machine's name), then click the Properties button. If the User Account Control screen appears, click Continue. 4. Click the Events tab on the WIA Canon XXX ser Properties (where "XXX" is your machine's name) screen. 5. Select Start this program for Actions, then select MP Navigator EX Ver4.0 from the pull-down menu.
Error Message Appears on a PictBridge Compliant Device Page 1000 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Error Message Appears on a PictBridge Compliant Device U334 Error Message Appears on a PictBridge Compliant Device The following are the possible errors that may occur when printing directly from a PictBridge compliant device and the countermeasures to clear them. Note This section describes errors that are indicated on Canon-brand PictBridge compliant devices.
Error Message Appears on a PictBridge Compliant Device "Hardware Error" Page 1001 of 1135 pages Ink tank errors have occurred. Replace the ink tank.
Cannot Print Properly from a Wireless Communication Device Page 1002 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Cannot Print Properly from a Wireless Communication Device U335 Cannot Print Properly from a Wireless Communication Device Check 1: Does your mobile phones store IrDA compliant infrared communication ports? Printing through infrared communication cannot be performed by the mobile phones does not store IrDA compliant infrared communication ports.
Cannot Remove a Memory Card Page 1003 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Cannot Remove a Memory Card U338 Cannot Remove a Memory Card Contact the service center. Important Never attempt to remove a memory card using a thin stick or tweezers. Doing so may damage the machine. Note Exclusive adapters are required for the following memory cards. Insert these cards in the machine with adapters attached.
Problems with Scanning Page 1004 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning S901 Problems with Scanning Scanner Does Not Work ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Does Not Start Error Message Appears and the ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screen Does Not Appear Scan Quality (Image Displayed on the Monitor) Is Poor Scanned Image Is Surrounded by Extra White Areas Cannot Scan Multiple Documents at One Time Cannot Scan Properly in Auto Scan Mode Slow Scanning Speed "There is not enough memo
Scanner Does Not Work Page 1005 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning > Scanner Does Not Work S902 Scanner Does Not Work Check 1: Make sure that the machine is turned on. Check 2: Connect the USB cable to a different USB port on the computer. Check 3: If the USB cable is connected to a USB hub, remove it from the USB hub and connect it to a USB port on the computer. Check 4: Restart the computer.
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Does Not Start Page 1006 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Does Not Start S903 ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Does Not Start Check 1: Make sure that the MP Drivers is installed. If it is not installed, insert the Setup CD-ROM into the computer's disc drive, then select Custom Install and install MP Drivers. Check 2: On the File menu of the application, select Select Source and select the machine.
Error Message Appears and the ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screen Do... Page 1007 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning > Error Message Appears and the ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screen Does Not Appear S904 Error Message Appears and the ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screen Does Not Appear Check 1: Make sure that the machine is turned on. Check 2: Turn off the machine, then reconnect the USB cable and replug the power cord.
Scan Quality (Image Displayed on the Monitor) Is Poor Page 1008 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning > Scan Quality (Image Displayed on the Monitor) Is Poor S905 Scan Quality (Image Displayed on the Monitor) Is Poor Check 1: Increase the scanning resolution. Resolution Check 2: Set the scale to 100%. Some applications do not display images clearly if the image is too small. Check 3: If moire (stripe pattern) appears, take the following measures and scan again.
Scan Quality (Image Displayed on the Monitor) Is Poor Page 1009 of 1135 pages Color Settings Tab Page top
Scanned Image Is Surrounded by Extra White Areas Page 1010 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning > Scanned Image Is Surrounded by Extra White Areas S906 Scanned Image Is Surrounded by Extra White Areas Check: Specify the scan area. (Auto Crop) in whole image view of ScanGear (scanner driver) to automatically display the Click cropping frame (scan area) according to the document size.
Cannot Scan Multiple Documents at One Time Page 1011 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning > Cannot Scan Multiple Documents at One Time S907 Cannot Scan Multiple Documents at One Time Check 1: Make sure that the documents are placed correctly on the Platen. Placing Documents Check 2: Scan each item individually. Some applications do not support multiple image scanning.
Cannot Scan Properly in Auto Scan Mode Page 1012 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning > Cannot Scan Properly in Auto Scan Mode S916 Cannot Scan Properly in Auto Scan Mode Check 1: Make sure that the documents are placed correctly on the Platen. Placing Documents Check 2: Multiple image scanning may not be supported. Some applications do not support multiple image scanning. In that case, scan each item individually.
Slow Scanning Speed Page 1013 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning > Slow Scanning Speed S908 Slow Scanning Speed Check 1: To view the image on a monitor, set the output resolution to around 150 dpi. To print, set it to around 300 dpi. Resolution Check 2: Set Fading Correction, Grain Correction, etc. to None.
"There is not enough memory." Message Is Displayed Page 1014 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning > "There is not enough memory." Message Is Displayed S909 "There is not enough memory." Message Is Displayed Check 1: Exit other applications and try again. Check 2: Reduce the resolution or output size and scan again.
Computer Stops Operating during Scanning Page 1015 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning > Computer Stops Operating during Scanning S910 Computer Stops Operating during Scanning Check 1: Restart the computer, reduce the output resolution in ScanGear (scanner driver) and scan again. Check 2: Delete unnecessary files to obtain sufficient free hard disk space, then scan again.
Scanner Does Not Work After Upgrading Windows Page 1016 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning > Scanner Does Not Work After Upgrading Windows S911 Scanner Does Not Work After Upgrading Windows Check: Disconnect the USB cable, then uninstall and reinstall the MP Drivers and MP Navigator EX. Step 1: Uninstall the MP Drivers. See "Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers " for details. Step 2: Uninstall MP Navigator EX. 1.
Problems with Scanning/Printing Film Page 1017 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning/Printing Film S920 Problems with Scanning/Printing Film Cannot Scan Film Scan Quality Is Poor or Colors Are Scanned Incorrectly Image Becomes Too Dark or Too Bright When a Cropping Frame Is Moved, Enlarged or Reduced Frames Are Not Detected Correctly Scanner Stops Operating during Scanning, or "There is not enough memory.
Cannot Scan Film Page 1018 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning/Printing Film > Cannot Scan Film S921 Cannot Scan Film Check 1: Make sure that the FAU (Film Adapter Unit) Protective Sheet is removed from the Document Cover. Check 2: Make sure that the Film Guide is placed correctly on the Platen. Check 3: Make sure that the calibration slot is not blocked. Do not block the calibration slot on the Film Guide with film or other items.
Scan Quality Is Poor or Colors Are Scanned Incorrectly Page 1019 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning/Printing Film > Scan Quality Is Poor or Colors Are Scanned Incorrectly S923 Scan Quality Is Poor or Colors Are Scanned Incorrectly If the quality of the image displayed on the monitor is poor, check Check 1 to Check 3. Check 1: The Platen or the light source on the Document Cover may be dusty or dirty.
Image Becomes Too Dark or Too Bright When a Cropping Frame Is ... Page 1020 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning/Printing Film > Image Becomes Too Dark or Too Bright When a Cropping Frame Is Moved, Enlarged or Reduced S924 Image Becomes Too Dark or Too Bright When a Cropping Frame Is Moved, Enlarged or Reduced Check: Follow these steps from the Advanced Mode tab of ScanGear (scanner driver). 1. Click Preview. The preview images are refreshed.
Frames Are Not Detected Correctly Page 1021 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning/Printing Film > Frames Are Not Detected Correctly S925 Frames Are Not Detected Correctly Check 1: Film may be out of position. Placing Film Check 2: The film may be extremely dark or bright, or the spaces between frames are extremely narrow (0.078 inches (2 mm) is standard). Follow these steps if thumbnails are not displayed correctly when previewed in ScanGear (scanner driver).
Frames Are Not Detected Correctly 5. Click Page 1022 of 1135 pages (Crop) and adjust the cropping frame to the desired size. 6. Click Scan. Starts scanning. Check 3: Check if there are frames that are not cropped even when the whole film image is displayed. On the Advanced Mode tab of ScanGear, click (Film Thumbnail) on the Toolbar to display the whole film image. Cropping frames appear on automatically detected frames.
Scanner Stops Operating during Scanning, or "There is not enough m... Page 1023 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning/Printing Film > Scanner Stops Operating during Scanning, or "There is not enough memory." Message Is Displayed S926 Scanner Stops Operating during Scanning, or "There is not enough memory." Message Is Displayed Check 1: Reduce the resolution or output size and scan again.
Colors Are Different between the Film and the Printed Photos (Reddis... Page 1024 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning/Printing Film > Colors Are Different between the Film and the Printed Photos (Reddish/Bluish) S927 Colors Are Different between the Film and the Printed Photos (Reddish/Bluish) Check: Save the scanned image to a computer, then adjust the colors using an image editing application and print.
Software Problems Page 1025 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Software Problems S930 Software Problems E-mail Software Program You Want to Use Does Not Appear in the Screen for Selecting an E-mail Software Program Scanned Image Is Printed Enlarged (Reduced) Scanned Image Is Enlarged (Reduced) on the Computer Monitor Scanned Image Does Not Open Page top
E-mail Software Program You Want to Use Does Not Appear in the Sc... Page 1026 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Software Problems > E-mail Software Program You Want to Use Does Not Appear in the Screen for Selecting an E-mail Software Program S931 E-mail Software Program You Want to Use Does Not Appear in the Screen for Selecting an E-mail Software Program Check 1: MP Navigator EX may not support the e-mail software program. The following e-mail software programs are supported.
Scanned Image Is Printed Enlarged (Reduced) Page 1027 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Software Problems > Scanned Image Is Printed Enlarged (Reduced) S932 Scanned Image Is Printed Enlarged (Reduced) Check: Set the printing size in the application.
Scanned Image Is Enlarged (Reduced) on the Computer Monitor Page 1028 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Software Problems > Scanned Image Is Enlarged (Reduced) on the Computer Monitor S933 Scanned Image Is Enlarged (Reduced) on the Computer Monitor Check 1: Change the display setting in the application. For details, refer to the application's manual. If you have any questions, contact the manufacturer of the application. Note You cannot reduce the image size in Paint.
Scanned Image Does Not Open Page 1029 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Software Problems > Scanned Image Does Not Open S934 Scanned Image Does Not Open Check: If the file format is not supported by the application, scan the image again and save it in a popular file format such as JPEG. For details, refer to the application's manual. If you have any questions, contact the manufacturer of the application.
MP Navigator EX Problems Page 1030 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > MP Navigator EX Problems S940 MP Navigator EX Problems Cannot Scan at the Correct Size Position or Size of the Image Cannot be Detected Correctly When Scanning Using the Operation Panel Document Is Placed Correctly, but the Scanned Image Is Slanted Document Is Placed Correctly, but the Orientation Changes in the Scanned Image Page top
Cannot Scan at the Correct Size Page 1031 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > MP Navigator EX Problems > Cannot Scan at the Correct Size S941 Cannot Scan at the Correct Size Check 1: Make sure that the documents are placed correctly on the Platen. Placing Documents Check 2: Set Document Size to the actual document size and scan again. If the matching size is not found, scan at a larger size and trim the image. See the Toolbar ( (Trimming)) in " Correct/Enhance Images Window " for details.
Position or Size of the Image Cannot be Detected Correctly When Sc... Page 1032 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > MP Navigator EX Problems > Position or Size of the Image Cannot be Detected Correctly When Scanning Using the Operation Panel S942 Position or Size of the Image Cannot be Detected Correctly When Scanning Using the Operation Panel Check 1: Make sure that the documents are placed correctly on the Platen.
Document Is Placed Correctly, but the Scanned Image Is Slanted Page 1033 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > MP Navigator EX Problems > Document Is Placed Correctly, but the Scanned Image Is Slanted S943 Document Is Placed Correctly, but the Scanned Image Is Slanted Check: In MP Navigator EX, deselect the Correct slanted document checkbox and scan again.
Document Is Placed Correctly, but the Orientation Changes in the Sc... Page 1034 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > MP Navigator EX Problems > Document Is Placed Correctly, but the Orientation Changes in the Scanned Image S944 Document Is Placed Correctly, but the Orientation Changes in the Scanned Image Check: In MP Navigator EX, deselect the Detect the orientation of text documents and rotate images checkbox and scan again.
Cannot Use the Contents on CREATIVE PARK PREMIUM Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Cannot Use the Contents on CREATIVE PARK PREMIUM U150 Cannot Use the Contents on CREATIVE PARK PREMIUM Cannot access CREATIVE PARK PREMIUM Check 1: Is the power on? If the power is off, an error message is displayed on the computer screen. Follow the instructions on the computer screen, turn on the machine, then access CREATIVE PARK PREMIUM again.
Cannot Use the Contents on CREATIVE PARK PREMIUM Page 1036 of 1135 pages Cannot Print the Contents on CREATIVE PARK PREMIUM Check 1: Is Easy-PhotoPrint EX installed? If Easy-PhotoPrint EX is not installed, you cannot print the contents on CREATIVE PARK PREMIUM. Install Easy-PhotoPrint EX, select the printing menu of the contents on Solution Menu EX, then print the contents on CREATIVE PARK PREMIUM.
If You Cannot Resolve the Problem Page 1037 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > If You Cannot Resolve the Problem U151 If You Cannot Resolve the Problem If you cannot resolve the problem with any of the workarounds in this chapter, please contact the seller of the machine or the service center. Canon support staff are trained to be able to provide technical support to satisfy customers. Caution If the machine emits any unusual sound, smoke, or odor, turn it off immediately.
FAQs Page 1038 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > FAQs U340 FAQs No Printing Results/Printing Is Blurred/Colors Are Wrong/White Streaks Machine Moves But Ink Is Not Ejected Cannot Install the MP Drivers Printing Does Not Start Copying/Printing Stops Before It Is Completed Writing Error/Output Error/Communication Error Print Results Not Satisfactory Paper Jams Paper Does Not Feed Properly Page top
Instructions for Use (Printer Driver) Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Instructions for Use (Printer Driver) P036 Instructions for Use (Printer Driver) This printer driver is subject to the following restrictions. Keep the following points in mind when using the printer driver. Restrictions on the Printer Driver Depending on the document type to be printed, the paper feed method specified in the printer driver may not operate correctly.
Instructions for Use (Printer Driver) Page 1040 of 1135 pages When you are using Bluetooth, you cannot use the operation panel on the machine while the status monitor is displayed from View Printer Status... on the Maintenance tab. Do not start up the Canon IJ Network Tool while printing. Do not print when the Canon IJ Network Tool is running. The card slot (memory card) of the machine may become inaccessible. In such cases, restart the machine or turn it off and reconnect the USB cable.
General Notes (Scanner Driver) Page 1041 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > General Notes (Scanner Driver) S004 General Notes (Scanner Driver) ScanGear (scanner driver) is subject to the following restrictions. Keep these points in mind when using it. Scanner Driver Restrictions When using the NTFS file system, the TWAIN data source may not be invoked. This is because the TWAIN module cannot be written to the winnt folder for security reasons.
General Notes (Scanner Driver) Page 1042 of 1135 pages Some applications do not support continuous scanning of multiple documents. In some cases, only the first scanned image is accepted, or multiple images are scanned as one image. To import scanned images into Microsoft Office 2000, first save them using MP Navigator EX, then import the saved files from the Insert menu. When scanning platen size images into Microsoft Office 2003 (Word, Excel, PowerPoint, etc.
Appendix Page 1043 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Appendix Appendix Before Printing on Art Paper Printing Area Setting Up the Card Slot as the Memory Card Drive of the Computer Editing the Print Document or Reprinting from the Print History Deleting the Undesired Print Job Interpreting the ICC Profile Updating the MP Drivers Uninstalling the On-Screen Manuals Transporting the Machine Opening the Printer Driver Setup Window Notice for Unplugging the Power Cord Downloading Premium Content Page top
Before Printing on Art Paper Advanced Guide > Appendix > Before Printing on Art Paper U501 Before Printing on Art Paper When using art paper, dust is liable to be generated. It is therefore recommended that paper dust be removed on art paper just before printing. You will need a soft hair brush (or similar brush used to clean office automation equipment). The wider the brush, the more effective it will be. OK - soft brush made from material such as polypropylene, polyethylene, horse hair or goat hair.
Before Printing on Art Paper Page 1045 of 1135 pages Page top
Printing Area Page 1046 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Appendix > Printing Area U504 Printing Area To ensure the best print quality, the machine allows a margin along each edge of media. The actual printable area will be the area inside these margins. Recommended printing area Printable area : Canon recommends that you print within this area. : The area where it is possible to print. However, printing in this area can affect the print quality or the paper feed precision.
Other Sizes than Letter, Legal, Envelopes Page 1047 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Appendix > Printing Area > Other Sizes than Letter, Legal, Envelopes U502 Other Sizes than Letter, Legal, Envelopes Size Printable Area (width x height) A5 5.56 x 7.95 inches / 141.2 x 202.0 mm A4 8.00 x 11.38 inches / 203.2 x 289.0 mm B5 6.90 x 9.80 inches / 175.2 x 249.0 mm 4" x 6" / 10 x 15 cm 3.73 x 5.69 inches / 94.8 x 144.4 mm 4" x 8" / 10 x 20 cm* 3.73 x 7.69 inches / 94.8 x 195.
Letter, Legal Page 1048 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Appendix > Printing Area > Letter, Legal U503 Letter, Legal Size Printable Area (width x height) Letter 8.00 x 10.69 inches / 203.2 x 271.4 mm Legal* 8.00 x 13.69 inches / 203.2 x 347.6 mm * This page size can be used only when printing from your computer.
Sizes for Art Paper Page 1049 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Appendix > Printing Area > Sizes for Art Paper U515 Sizes for Art Paper When using Fine Art Paper "Photo Rag" or non Canon genuine specialty paper, printing is not done in a 1.38 inches / 35 mm margin along the top and bottom edges. A limit is set to prevent printing along a 1.38 inches / 35 mm margin on the top and bottom edges when a paper size for Art Paper is selected in the printer driver.
Envelopes Page 1050 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Appendix > Printing Area > Envelopes U505 Envelopes Size Recommended Printing Area (width x height) European DL* 4.06 x 7.07 inches / 103.2 x 179.6 mm US Comm. Env. #10* 3.86 x 7.91 inches / 98.0 x 200.9 mm * This page size can be used only when printing from your computer.
Setting Up the Card Slot as the Memory Card Drive of the Computer Advanced Guide > Appendix > Setting Up the Card Slot as the Memory Card Drive of the Computer U020 Setting Up the Card Slot as the Memory Card Drive of the Computer The Card Slot of the machine can also be used as the memory card drive of the computer. Note For details on using the Card Slot over a network, see Using the Card Slot over a Network .
Setting Up the Card Slot as the Memory Card Drive of the Computer Page 1052 of 1135 pages removal" operation on your computer before physically removing the memory card from your machine. Right-click the Removable Disk icon and click Eject. If Eject is not displayed on the screen, confirm that the Access lamp is not flashing and remove the memory card. Over a network, the removal operation is not needed.
Editing the Print Document or Reprinting from the Print History Page 1053 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Appendix > Editing the Print Document or Reprinting from the Print History P048 Editing the Print Document or Reprinting from the Print History This function is unavailable when the standard IJ printer driver is used. In the Canon IJ XPS preview window, you can edit the print document or retrieve the document print history to print the document.
Editing the Print Document or Reprinting from the Print History Page 1054 of 1135 pages 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Set the preview Check the Preview before printing check box on the Quick Setup tab or the Main tab. 3. Complete the setup Click OK. The Canon IJ XPS Preview will start and the print result will be displayed before printing. 4. Editing print documents and print pages Combining print documents You can combine multiple print documents to form a single document.
Editing the Print Document or Reprinting from the Print History Page 1055 of 1135 pages Reprinting from the Print History When you click Save Print History on the File menu to enable the setting, the document printed from the preview is saved, and you can reprint the document with the same settings. 1. Displaying the print history Select the Start menu -> All Programs -> "Your model name" -> View Print History XPS. The saved print document is displayed in the preview.
Deleting the Undesired Print Job Page 1056 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Appendix > Deleting the Undesired Print Job P037 Deleting the Undesired Print Job If you are using the XPS printer driver, replace "Canon IJ Status Monitor" with "Canon IJ XPS Status Monitor" when reading this information. If the printer does not start printing, cancelled or failed print job data may be remaining. Delete the undesired print job by using the Canon IJ Status Monitor. 1.
Interpreting the ICC Profile Page 1057 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data > Specifying Color Correction > Interpreting the ICC Profile P049 Interpreting the ICC Profile When you need to specify the machine profile, select the ICC profile for the paper to print on. The ICC profiles installed for this machine appear as follows. (1) is the model name of the printer.
Updating the MP Drivers Page 1058 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Appendix > Updating the MP Drivers Updating the MP Drivers Obtaining the Latest MP Drivers Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers Before Installing the MP Drivers Installing the MP Drivers Page top
Obtaining the Latest MP Drivers Page 1059 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Appendix > Updating the MP Drivers > Obtaining the Latest MP Drivers P038 Obtaining the Latest MP Drivers The MP Drivers include a printer driver and scanner driver (ScanGear). By updating the MP Drivers to the latest version of the MP Drivers, unresolved problems may be solved. Access our web site through the Internet and download the latest MP Drivers for your model.
Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers Advanced Guide > Appendix > Updating the MP Drivers > Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers P039 Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers The MP Drivers which you no longer use can be deleted. When deleting the MP Drivers, first exit all programs that are running. The procedure to delete the unnecessary MP Drivers is as follows: When There is an Uninstaller 1.
Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers Page 1061 of 1135 pages If you are using Windows Vista, when the User Account Control dialog box appears, click Continue. Then when the confirmation message appears, click Yes. The icon is deleted. 3. Select the printer driver to be deleted If you are using Windows 7, click any icon in Printers and Faxes. On the commandbar, click Print server properties, and then click the Drivers tab. If the Change Driver Settings button is displayed, click that button.
Before Installing the MP Drivers Page 1062 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Appendix > Updating the MP Drivers > Before Installing the MP Drivers P040 Before Installing the MP Drivers This section describes the items that you should check before installing the MP Drivers. You should also refer to this section if the MP Drivers cannot be installed. Checking the Machine Status Properly connect the personal computer and the machine.
Installing the MP Drivers Advanced Guide > Appendix > Updating the MP Drivers > Installing the MP Drivers P041 Installing the MP Drivers You can access our web site through the Internet and download the latest MP Drivers for your model. The procedure for installing the downloaded MP Drivers is as follows: 1. Turn off the machine 2. Start the installer Double-click the icon of the downloaded file. The installation program starts.
Installing the MP Drivers Page 1064 of 1135 pages Obtaining the Latest MP Drivers Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers Before Installing the MP Drivers Page top
Uninstalling the On-Screen Manuals Page 1065 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Appendix > Uninstalling the On-Screen Manuals U509 Uninstalling the On-Screen Manuals Follow the procedure below to uninstall all of the installed on-screen manuals from your computer. Before uninstalling the on-screen manuals, exit all on-screen manuals that are opening. 1. Click Start > All Programs > Canon XXX Manual (where " XXX" is your machine's name) > Uninstall. 2. Click OK when the confirmation message appears.
Transporting the Machine Page 1066 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Appendix > Transporting the Machine U510 Transporting the Machine When relocating the machine, pack the machine using the original packing materials. If you do not have the original packing materials, pack the machine carefully using protective material and place it inside a sturdy box. Important Do not transport or store the machine slanted, vertically, or upside-down, as the ink may leak and damage the machine. 1.
Opening the Printer Driver Setup Window Page 1067 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Appendix > Opening the Printer Driver Setup Window U511 Opening the Printer Driver Setup Window The printer driver setup window can be displayed through the application software in use or the Start menu of the Windows. Open the Printer Driver Setup Window through the Application Software Follow the procedure below to configure print settings when printing. 1.
Notice for Unplugging the Power Cord Advanced Guide > Appendix > Notice for Unplugging the Power Cord U516 Notice for Unplugging the Power Cord To unplug the power cord, follow the procedure below. Important When you unplug the power cord, press the ON button, then confirm that the POWER lamp is off. Unplugging the power cord while the machine is still on may cause drying or clogging of the Print Head and print quality may be reduced. 1. Press the ON button to turn the machine off. 2.
Notice for Unplugging the Power Cord Page 1069 of 1135 pages The specification of the power cord differs depending on the country or region of use.
Downloading Premium Content Page 1070 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Appendix > Downloading Premium Content A006 Downloading Premium Content Access the CREATIVE PARK PREMIUM website from Solution Menu EX to download content printable with Easy-PhotoPrint EX and other applications. Important You may only use the content downloaded or printed for personal purposes. You may not use the content for commercial purposes. 1.
Using Easy-PhotoPrint EX Page 1071 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Using Easy-PhotoPrint EX A001 Using Easy-PhotoPrint EX --- Transforming Your Photos into Creative Works of Art --Easy-PhotoPrint EX allows you to create albums, calendars and stickers easily using photos taken with digital cameras. You can also print borderless photos easily. Start Easy-PhotoPrint EX Click Here: Easy-PhotoPrint EX Note See the section below for details on how to use Easy-PhotoPrint EX.
Using Easy-PhotoPrint EX Page 1072 of 1135 pages CHECK! Select Album to add text and frames. You cannot decorate photos with Photo Print. Create a Calendar Using Your Favorite Photos Create calendars easily with Easy-PhotoPrint EX. Create your own calendar using your favorite photos! It'll be exciting to turn the calendar pages. You can use all kinds of photos. You can also create 2-month, 6-month and 12-month calendars.
Using Easy-PhotoPrint EX Page 1073 of 1135 pages Page top
Using MP Navigator EX Page 1074 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > Using MP Navigator EX S001 Using MP Navigator EX MP Navigator EX is an application that enables you to easily scan photos and documents. It is suitable even for beginners. Start MP Navigator EX Click Here: MP Navigator EX Note See " Let's Try Scanning" for details on how to scan images using MP Navigator EX. Scan Photos and Documents You can scan easily by navigating through MP Navigator EX screens.
Using MP Navigator EX Page 1075 of 1135 pages Scan with One-click In One-click Mode, MP Navigator EX completes from scanning to saving, with a click of an icon. One-click Mode also allows you to scan and save images as PDF files or attach them to e-mail automatically. Scan and Correct/Enhance Photos You can easily correct/enhance scanned photos using MP Navigator EX. You do not need to use other applications.
About Network Communication Page 1076 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > About Network Communication About Network Communication Changing and Confirming Network Settings Troubleshooting Appendix Glossary Page top
Changing and Confirming Network Settings Page 1077 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Changing and Confirming Network Settings Changing and Confirming Network Settings Canon IJ Network Tool Canon IJ Network Tool Dialog Box Canon IJ Network Tool Menus Changing the Settings in the Wireless LAN Sheet Changing the WPA or WPA2 Detailed Settings Changing the Settings in the Wired LAN Sheet (For MG6100 series/MG8100 series) Changing the Settings in the Admin Password Sheet Monitoring
Canon IJ Network Tool Page 1078 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Changing and Confirming Network Settings > Canon IJ Network Tool N010 Canon IJ Network Tool The Canon IJ Network Tool is a utility that enables you to display and modify the machine network settings. It is installed when the machine is set up. Important Do not start up the Canon IJ Network Tool while printing. Do not print when the Canon IJ Network Tool is running.
Canon IJ Network Tool Dialog Box Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Changing and Confirming Network Settings Dialog Box Page 1079 of 1135 pages > Canon IJ Network Tool N011 Canon IJ Network Tool Dialog Box This section describes the items displayed on the Canon IJ Network Tool dialog box. Important To use the machine over LAN, make sure you have the equipment necessary for the connection type, such as an access point or a LAN cable. 1.
Canon IJ Network Tool Dialog Box Page 1080 of 1135 pages Note You cannot configure a printer that has the status Not Found. This item has the same function as Configuration in the Settings menu.
Canon IJ Network Tool Menus Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Changing and Confirming Network Settings Page 1081 of 1135 pages > Canon IJ Network Tool Menus N012 Canon IJ Network Tool Menus This section describes the menus in the Canon IJ Network Tool dialog box. 1. File menu Exit Exits the Canon IJ Network Tool. 2. View menu Status Displays the Status dialog box to confirm the printer connection status and wireless communication status.
Canon IJ Network Tool Menus Page 1082 of 1135 pages Enables or disables automatic display of the application's online help. When this menu is selected, the application's online help is displayed if one or more ports are unavailable for printing. 3. Settings menu Configuration Displays the Configuration dialog box to configure settings of the selected printer. Note This item has the same function as Configuration in the Canon IJ Network Tool dialog box.
Changing the Settings in the Wireless LAN Sheet Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Changing and Confirming Network Settings in the Wireless LAN Sheet Page 1083 of 1135 pages > Changing the Settings N013 Changing the Settings in the Wireless LAN Sheet To change the wireless network settings of the printer, connect the printer and the computer with a USB cable temporarily.
Changing the Settings in the Wireless LAN Sheet The SSID of the wireless LAN is displayed. Note Enter the same SSID that the access point is configured to use. The SSID is casesensitive. 3. Search The Search dialog box is displayed to select an access point to connect to. Search dialog box Note When the Canon IJ Network Tool runs over a LAN, the button is grayed out and cannot be selected. Connect the printer and the computer with a USB cable temporarily to change the settings. 4.
Changing the Settings in the Wireless LAN Sheet Search dialog box 1. Detected Access Points The signal strength from the access point, encryption type, name of access point, and the radio channel can be confirmed. Important If you connect to a network that is not protected with security measures, there is a risk of disclosing data such as your personal information to a third party. Note Signal strength is displayed as follows. : Good : Fair : Poor Type of encryption is displayed as follows.
Changing the Settings in the Wireless LAN Sheet Page 1086 of 1135 pages Specify the printer WEP settings. When changing the password (WEP key), the same change must be made to the password (WEP key) of the access point. 1. WEP Key Enter the same key as the one set to the access point. The number of characters and character type that can be entered differ depending on the key length and key format.
Changing the WPA or WPA2 Detailed Settings Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Changing and Confirming Network Settings WPA2 Detailed Settings Page 1087 of 1135 pages > Changing the WPA or N014 Changing the WPA or WPA2 Detailed Settings To change the wireless network settings of the printer, connect the printer and the computer with a USB cable temporarily.
Changing the WPA or WPA2 Detailed Settings 1. Authentication Type Type of authentication used for client authentication is displayed. This machine supports the PSK authentication method. PSK This authentication type uses a passphrase entered in the next screen. 8. Enter the passphrase, confirm the type of dynamic encryption and click Next. 1. Passphrase Enter the passphrase set to the access point. The passphrase should be a string of 8 to 63 alphanumeric characters or a 64-digit hexadecimal value.
Changing the WPA or WPA2 Detailed Settings Page 1089 of 1135 pages Important If the printer cannot communicate with the computer after the encryption type of the printer was switched, make sure that encryption types for the computer and the access point matches that set to the printer.
Changing the Settings in the Wired LAN Sheet (For MG6100 series/M... Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Changing and Confirming Network Settings in the Wired LAN Sheet (For MG6100 series/MG8100 series) Page 1090 of 1135 pages > Changing the Settings N016 Changing the Settings in the Wired LAN Sheet (For MG6100 series/MG8100 series) Note Select Wired LAN active in the Change wireless/wired on the Operation Panel to change the settings in the Wired LAN sheet.
Changing the Settings in the Admin Password Sheet Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Changing and Confirming Network Settings in the Admin Password Sheet Page 1091 of 1135 pages > Changing the Settings N017 Changing the Settings in the Admin Password Sheet 1. Start up the Canon IJ Network Tool. Starting up Canon IJ Network Tool 2. Select the printer in Printers. 3. Select Configuration from the Settings menu. 4. Click the Admin Password tab. 1.
Monitoring Wireless Network Status Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Changing and Confirming Network Settings Network Status Page 1092 of 1135 pages > Monitoring Wireless N018 Monitoring Wireless Network Status Note When using the printer over the Wired LAN, Signal Strength, Link Quality, or Advanced Measurement is not available. 1. Start up the Canon IJ Network Tool. Starting up Canon IJ Network Tool 2. Select the printer in Printers. 3. Select Status from the View menu. 1.
Initializing the Network Settings of the Machine Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Changing and Confirming Network Settings Settings of the Machine Page 1093 of 1135 pages > Initializing the Network N019 Initializing the Network Settings of the Machine Important Note that initialization erases all network settings on the machine, and printing or scanning operation from a computer over network may become impossible.
Viewing the Modified Settings Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Changing and Confirming Network Settings Settings Page 1094 of 1135 pages > Viewing the Modified N020 Viewing the Modified Settings The Confirmation dialog box is displayed when you modified the printer settings on the Configuration dialog box. When you click Yes on the Confirmation dialog box, the following screen is displayed for confirming the modified settings. 1.
Printing Out Network Setting Information Page 1095 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Changing and Confirming Network Settings Setting Information > Printing Out Network N022 Printing Out Network Setting Information You can print out the network settings of the machine such as its IP address and SSID. Important This print out contains valuable information about your computer. Handle it with care. 1. Make sure that the machine is turned on. 2.
Printing Out Network Setting Information Page 1096 of 1135 pages Signal Strength Signal Strength 0 to 100 [%] TCP/IP Version TCP/IP Version IPv4/IPv6 IP Address Selected IP Address XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX Default Gateway Default Gateway XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX Subnet Mask*1 Subnet Mask XXX.XXX.XXX.
Printing Out Network Setting Information Page 1097 of 1135 pages Authentication Method of the Authentication none/auto/open/shared/WPA-PSK/WPA2PSK Signal Strength Signal Strength 0 to 100 [%] TCP/IP Version TCP/IP Version IPv4/IPv6 IP Address Selected IP Address XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX Default Gateway Default Gateway XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX Subnet Mask*1 Subnet Mask XXX.XXX.XXX.
Troubleshooting Page 1098 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Troubleshooting How to Set a Network Key/Network Password/Passphrase Cannot Communicate With the Machine/Cannot Print from the Machine The Following Screen Is Displayed During Setup Printer Status Monitor of the Machine Does Not Operate Cannot Print, Scan, or Access the Card Slot from a Computer Connected to the Network It Takes a Long Time for Printing to Start The Admin Password Set
Troubleshooting Page 1099 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting N040 Troubleshooting This section describes troubleshooting tips for problems you may encounter when using the machine. For troubleshooting tips related to the setup, refer to the Network Setup Troubleshooting .
How to Set a Network Key/Network Password/Passphrase Page 1100 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Troubleshooting > How to Set a Network Key/Network Password/ Passphrase N041 How to Set a Network Key/Network Password/Passphrase Cannot Connect with an Access Point to Which a WEP/WPA/WPA2 Key Is Set (You Forgot the WEP/ WPA/WPA2 Key) How to Set a WEP/WPA/WPA2 Key Cannot Connect with an Access Point to Which a WEP/WPA/WPA2 Key Is Set (You Forgot the WEP/WPA/WPA2 Key) For informat
How to Set a Network Key/Network Password/Passphrase Page 1101 of 1135 pages Page top
Cannot Communicate With the Machine/Cannot Print from the Machine Page 1102 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Troubleshooting > Cannot Communicate With the Machine/Cannot Print from the Machine N042 Cannot Communicate With the Machine/Cannot Print from the Machine Cannot Communicate with the Machine After Applying MAC/IP Address Filtering or Entering a WEP/ WPA/WPA2 Key to the Access Point Cannot Communicate with the Machine After the Network Settings Are Changed Cannot Conne
Cannot Communicate With the Machine/Cannot Print from the Machine Page 1103 of 1135 pages Check 2: Make sure that Wireless LAN active is selected in WLAN active/inactive or Change wireless/wired on the Operation Panel. Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD Check 3: If a network key is set to the access point, set the machine to match it. How to Set a WEP/WPA/WPA2 Key Check 4: Make sure that the valid wireless channel is used.
Cannot Communicate With the Machine/Cannot Print from the Machine Page 1104 of 1135 pages Opening the Printer Driver Setup Window Cannot Communicate with the Machine over the Wireless LAN Check 1: Make sure that the machine is turned on. Check 2: Is Change wireless/wired or WLAN active/inactive in LAN settings set to Disable LAN? Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD Check 3: Make sure that the network settings in the machine are identical with those of the access point.
Cannot Communicate With the Machine/Cannot Print from the Machine Page 1105 of 1135 pages When using wireless LAN, make sure that there is no barrier or obstacle between the access point and the machine. Cannot Communicate with the Machine over the Wired LAN Check 1: Make sure that the machine is turned on. Check 2: Is Change wireless/wired in LAN settings set to Disable LAN? Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD Check 3: Make sure that the LAN cable is connected properly.
Cannot Communicate With the Machine/Cannot Print from the Machine Page 1106 of 1135 pages There may be a device such as a microwave oven using the same frequency bandwidth as the wireless station. Place the wireless devices as far away from the interference source as possible. Check 11: Make sure that the network settings of the computer are correct. Make sure that the computer can communicate with the printer and the access point over the wireless LAN.
The Following Screen Is Displayed During Setup Page 1107 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Troubleshooting > The Following Screen Is Displayed During Setup N043 The Following Screen Is Displayed During Setup The Enter Password Dialog Box Is Displayed During Setup The Dialog Box for Setting the Encryption Is Displayed After Selecting the Access Point in the Search Dialog Box "You are connecting the machine to the non encrypted wireless network" Is Displayed The Enter Password
Printer Status Monitor of the Machine Does Not Operate Page 1108 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Troubleshooting > Printer Status Monitor of the Machine Does Not Operate N044 Printer Status Monitor of the Machine Does Not Operate Use the printer driver with bidirectional communication. Select Enable bidirectional support in the Ports sheet of the properties dialog box of the printer driver.
Cannot Print, Scan, or Access the Card Slot from a Computer Connec... Page 1109 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Troubleshooting > Cannot Print, Scan, or Access the Card Slot from a Computer Connected to the Network N045 Cannot Print, Scan, or Access the Card Slot from a Computer Connected to the Network Check 1: Make sure that the network settings of the computer are correct.
It Takes a Long Time for Printing to Start Page 1110 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Troubleshooting > It Takes a Long Time for Printing to Start N046 It Takes a Long Time for Printing to Start Check 1: The machine may be printing out or scanning a large job issued from another computer. Check 2: Make sure that the radio status is good and adjust the installation positions while monitoring the radio status with Canon IJ Network Tool.
The Admin Password Set to the Machine Was Forgotten Page 1111 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Troubleshooting > The Admin Password Set to the Machine Was Forgotten N047 The Admin Password Set to the Machine Was Forgotten Initialize the LAN settings. Restoring the Machine's Network Settings to Factory Default After initializing the LAN settings, refer to your setup manual of the machine to set up the machine again.
Checking Information about the Network Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Troubleshooting > Checking Information about the Network N049 Checking Information about the Network Checking the IP Address or the MAC Address of the Machine Checking the IP Address or the MAC Address of the Computer Checking If the Computer and the Machine, or Computer and the Access Point Can Communicate Checking the Network Setting Information Checking the IP Address or the MAC Address of the Machine To check the
Checking Information about the Network Page 1113 of 1135 pages Page top
Restoring the Machine's Network Settings to Factory Default Page 1114 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Troubleshooting > Restoring the Machine's Network Settings to Factory Default N050 Restoring the Machine's Network Settings to Factory Default Important Note that initialization erases all network settings on the machine, and printing or scanning operation from a computer over network may become impossible.
Updating the MP Drivers Page 1115 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Troubleshooting > Updating the MP Drivers N051 Updating the MP Drivers Download the latest MP Drivers in advance. To obtain the latest MP Drivers, access our web site through the Internet and download the latest MP Drivers for your model. After uninstalling the MP Drivers, install the latest MP Drivers according to the regular procedure.
Uninstalling the Canon IJ Network Tool/Canon IJ Network Scan Utility Page 1116 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Troubleshooting > Uninstalling the Canon IJ Network Tool/Canon IJ Network Scan Utility N053 Uninstalling the Canon IJ Network Tool/Canon IJ Network Scan Utility Uninstalling the Canon IJ Network Tool Follow the procedure below to uninstall the Canon IJ Network Tool from your computer.
Cannot Mount the Card Slot Page 1117 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Troubleshooting > Cannot Mount the Card Slot N054 Cannot Mount the Card Slot The Available Drive Letter Cannot Be Selected on the Network Setup of the Card Slot Dialog Box The Card Slot Cannot Be Mounted with the Canon IJ Network Tool The Available Drive Letter Cannot Be Selected on the Network Setup of the Card Slot Dialog Box On this dialog box, only D to Z can be selected as the network drive for the C
Cannot Use the Card Slot Page 1118 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Troubleshooting > Cannot Use the Card Slot N055 Cannot Use the Card Slot Check 1: Is the icon of the Card Slot displayed? To use the Card Slot over network, you have to mount the Card Slot as the network drive of the computer. The canon_memory (\\xxxxxxxxxxxx) (or canon_memory on `xxxxxxxxxxxx') icon with the mapped drive letter appears on Computer (or My Computer).
Cannot Access to the Memory Card in the Card Slot Using MP Navigat... Page 1119 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Troubleshooting > Cannot Access to the Memory Card in the Card Slot Using MP Navigator EX N056 Cannot Access to the Memory Card in the Card Slot Using MP Navigator EX If "Cannot access the memory card" is displayed when you click Memory Card under Scan/Import Documents or Images on MP Navigator EX, confirm what the message says, then click Retry.
Cannot Access to the Card Slot Because of Some Security Settings on... Page 1120 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Troubleshooting > Cannot Access to the Card Slot Because of Some Security Settings on the Computer N057 Cannot Access to the Card Slot Because of Some Security Settings on the Computer Check 1: Make sure that Read/write attribute in Device user settings is set to Writable from LAN PC.
Cannot Access to the Card Slot Because of Some Security Settings on... Page 1121 of 1135 pages 2. Click the Advanced settings. If the User Account Control screen is displayed, click Yes. 3. Right-click Inbound Rules, then select New Rule. If you set outbound rules, right-click Outbound Rules. 4. Select Port, then click Next. 5. Select TCP, then select Special local ports: and input "137", then click Next. If you open UDP ports, select UDP.
Cannot Access to the Card Slot Because of Some Security Settings on... Page 1122 of 1135 pages 1. Right-click Computer, select Properties, then click Change settings. In Windows Vista, right-click Computer, select Properties, then click Change settings. In Windows XP, right-click My Computer, then select Properties. 2. Click the Computer Name tab, then click Change. 3. Change the workgroup name to "WORKGROUP", then click OK.
Date Modified of Files Changes When Saving Them on the Memory C...
Appendix Page 1124 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Appendix Appendix Restrictions Initial Values Set at Factory (Network) Using the Card Slot over a Network Page top
Restrictions Page 1125 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Appendix > Restrictions N002 Restrictions If you use a printer over the wireless LAN, the printer may recognize nearby wireless systems, you should set a network key (WEP, WPA, or WPA2) to the access point to encrypt wireless transmission. Wireless communication with a product that does not comply with the Wi-Fi standard cannot be guaranteed.
Initial Values Set at Factory (Network) Page 1126 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Appendix > Initial Values Set at Factory (Network) N003 Initial Values Set at Factory (Network) Item Initial Values Enable/disable LAN Disable LAN SSID BJNPSETUP Communication mode Infrastructure Wireless Security Disable IP address Getting automatically Printer name setting* XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX IPv4/IPv6 setting IPv4 Set memory card sharing Enable Enable/disable WSD (WSD settings
Using the Card Slot over a Network Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Appendix > Using the Card Slot over a Network N004 Using the Card Slot over a Network Confirming Whether the Card Slot is Mounted Mounting the Card Slot as the Network Drive Restrictions on Card Slot Use over a Network Confirming Whether the Card Slot is Mounted The Card Slot must be mounted to use it over a network. When the Card Slot is mounted, the following icon appears on Computer (or My Computer).
Using the Card Slot over a Network 6. Confirm that the Computer). Page 1128 of 1135 pages canon_memory icon for the Card Slot appears on Computer (or My Note If the Card Slot cannot be mounted properly, see Cannot Mount the Card Slot . Restrictions on Card Slot Use over a Network The Card Slot can be shared by multiple computers, if the machine is connected to a network. Multiple computers can read files from a memory card in the Card Slot at the same time.
Using the Card Slot over a Network Page 1129 of 1135 pages to the Internet via a router. For information on using a router, contact your Internet service provider or a network device manufacturer. If you write files to a memory card over a network when the Canon IJ Network Scan Utility is not running, the Date Modified of the files may not be proper. Make sure to start up the Canon IJ Network Scan Utility before you write files to a memory card over the network.
Glossary Page 1130 of 1135 pages Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Glossary Glossary About Technical Terms Page top
About Technical Terms Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Glossary > About Technical Terms N100 About Technical Terms In this section, technical terms used in the manual are explained. A B C D F I K L M O P R S T U W A Access Point A wireless transceiver or base station that receives information from wireless clients/the machine and rebroadcasts it. Required in an infrastructure network.
About Technical Terms The printer automatically changes its authentication method to match the access point. Open System In this authentication method, the communication partner is authenticated without using WEP key even if Use WEP is selected. Shared Key In this authentication method, the communication partner is authenticated using the WEP key that was set for encryption. B Bonjour A service built into Mac OS X operating system to detect the connectable devices on a network automatically.
About Technical Terms Page 1133 of 1135 pages Compatible with 802.11b and 802.11g. Infrastructure Client computer and machine setup where all wireless communications pass through an access point. IP Address A unique number with four parts separated by dots. Every network device that is connected to the Internet has an IP address. Example: 192.168.0.1 An IP address is usually assigned by an access point or a DHCP server of the router automatically.
About Technical Terms Machine . O Operation Status Indicates the status on whether the printer can be used. P PSK An encryption method employed by WPA/WPA2. R Router A relay device to connect to another network. S Signal Strength The strength of the signal received by the printer from the access point is indicated with a value from 0 to 100%. SSID Unique label for wireless LAN. It is often represented such as a network name or an access point name.
About Technical Terms Page 1135 of 1135 pages USB Serial interface designed to enable you to "hot-swap" devices, i.e., by plugging and unplugging them without turning off the power. W WCN (Windows Connect Now) Users running Windows Vista or later can easily create network configuration settings and transmit them to the access point using a USB flash drive (WCN-UFD). Alternatively, they can obtain the setting information directly via wireless network without using a USB flash drive (WCN-NET).
